Lexmark Printer 13C0084 User Manual
X46x Series  
User's Guide  
February 2009  
www.lexmark.com  
Machine type(s):  
7014, 4569, 4570  
Model(s):  
431, 636, 63W, n01, n02, g01, g02, n11, n12, g11, g12, hn1, hn2, wh1, wh2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port...........................................65  
Setting up serial printing..................................................................................................................................................67  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact.....................70  
Saving paper and toner.....................................................................................................................................................70  
Using recycled paper..................................................................................................................................................................... 70  
Conserving supplies....................................................................................................................................................................... 70  
Saving energy.......................................................................................................................................................................71  
Using Eco-Mode .............................................................................................................................................................................. 71  
Adjusting Power Saver.................................................................................................................................................................. 72  
Adjusting the brightness of the display ................................................................................................................................. 73  
Setting the standard exit bin light............................................................................................................................................ 73  
Recycling.................................................................................................................................................................................74  
Recycling Lexmark products....................................................................................................................................................... 74  
Recycling Lexmark packaging.................................................................................................................................................... 74  
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling......................................................................................................... 75  
Reducing printer noise......................................................................................................................................................75  
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................77  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type........................................................................................................................77  
Configuring Universal paper settings..........................................................................................................................77  
Avoiding jams.......................................................................................................................................................................78  
Loading trays.........................................................................................................................................................................78  
Using the multipurpose feeder......................................................................................................................................82  
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................................87  
Linking trays...................................................................................................................................................................................... 87  
Unlinking trays................................................................................................................................................................................. 87  
Assigning a custom paper type name..................................................................................................................................... 88  
Changing a Custom Type <x> name....................................................................................................................................... 88  
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................90  
Paper guidelines..................................................................................................................................................................90  
Paper characteristics...................................................................................................................................................................... 90  
Unacceptable paper ...................................................................................................................................................................... 91  
Selecting paper................................................................................................................................................................................ 91  
Using recycled paper and other office papers ..................................................................................................................... 91  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead........................................................................................................................... 92  
Storing paper.................................................................................................................................................................................... 92  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................................93  
Paper sizes supported by the printer ...................................................................................................................................... 93  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ........................................................................................................... 94  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper capacities............................................................................................................................................................................... 95  
Printing...............................................................................................96  
Printing a document..........................................................................................................................................................96  
Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)......................................................................................................96  
Printing on specialty media.............................................................................................................................................97  
Tips on using letterhead............................................................................................................................................................... 97  
Tips on using transparencies...................................................................................................................................................... 97  
Tips on using envelopes............................................................................................................................................................... 97  
Tips on using labels........................................................................................................................................................................ 98  
Tips on using card stock............................................................................................................................................................... 98  
Printing confidential and other held jobs...................................................................................................................99  
Holding jobs in the printer .......................................................................................................................................................... 99  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows .............................................................................................100  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer...................................................................100  
Printing from a flash drive..............................................................................................................................................101  
Printing information pages...........................................................................................................................................102  
Printing a font sample list..........................................................................................................................................................102  
Printing a directory list................................................................................................................................................................102  
Printing the print quality test pages......................................................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel ......................................................................................................103  
Canceling a print job from the computer............................................................................................................................103  
Copying.............................................................................................105  
Making copies....................................................................................................................................................................105  
Making a quick copy....................................................................................................................................................................105  
Copying using the ADF...............................................................................................................................................................105  
Copying using the scanner glass ............................................................................................................................................106  
Copying photos.................................................................................................................................................................106  
Copying on specialty media..........................................................................................................................................106  
Making transparencies................................................................................................................................................................106  
Copying to letterhead.................................................................................................................................................................107  
Customizing copy settings............................................................................................................................................107  
Copying from one size to another..........................................................................................................................................107  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ..............................................................................................................107  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)..............................................................................................................108  
Reducing or enlarging copies ..................................................................................................................................................108  
Adjusting copy quality................................................................................................................................................................108  
Collating copies.............................................................................................................................................................................109  
Placing separator sheets between copies ...........................................................................................................................109  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet......................................................................................................................110  
Contents  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a custom job (job build)...........................................................................................................................................110  
Pausing the current print job to make copies........................................................................................................111  
Placing information on copies.....................................................................................................................................111  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page..........................................................................................................111  
Placing an overlay message on each page..........................................................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF ...............................................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass .........................................................................112  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed ..............................................................................................112  
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................................113  
Copy from........................................................................................................................................................................................113  
Copy to .............................................................................................................................................................................................113  
Scale...................................................................................................................................................................................................113  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................113  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................113  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................114  
Collate...............................................................................................................................................................................................114  
Options .............................................................................................................................................................................................114  
Improving copy quality...................................................................................................................................................115  
E-mailing..........................................................................................116  
Getting ready to e-mail...................................................................................................................................................116  
Enabling the e-mail function....................................................................................................................................................116  
Setting up the e-mail function.................................................................................................................................................117  
Configuring the e-mail settings...............................................................................................................................................117  
Creating an e-mail shortcut...........................................................................................................................................117  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ...................................................................................117  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen........................................................................................................118  
E-mailing a document.....................................................................................................................................................118  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen..........................................................................................................................118  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number ......................................................................................................................118  
Sending an e-mail using the address book.........................................................................................................................119  
Customizing e-mail settings.........................................................................................................................................119  
Adding e-mail subject and message information.............................................................................................................119  
Changing the output file type..................................................................................................................................................120  
Canceling an e-mail..........................................................................................................................................................120  
Understanding e-mail options.....................................................................................................................................120  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................120  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................120  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................121  
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................121  
E-mail Subject ................................................................................................................................................................................121  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail File Name............................................................................................................................................................................121  
E-mail Message..............................................................................................................................................................................121  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................121  
Send As.............................................................................................................................................................................................121  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................121  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................122  
Faxing...............................................................................................123  
Getting the printer ready to fax...................................................................................................................................123  
Setting up the printer to fax .....................................................................................................................................................123  
Choosing a fax connection........................................................................................................................................................123  
Connecting to an analog telephone line .............................................................................................................................124  
Connecting to a DSL service .....................................................................................................................................................125  
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system.....................................................................................................................................125  
Connecting to a distinctive ring service...............................................................................................................................126  
Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line.........................126  
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region.....................................................................................................128  
Connecting to a computer with a modem..........................................................................................................................132  
Enabling the fax function...........................................................................................................................................................133  
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup.................................................................................................................134  
Setting the date and time..........................................................................................................................................................134  
Turning daylight saving time on or off .................................................................................................................................134  
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................................135  
Sending a fax using the printer control panel....................................................................................................................135  
Sending a fax using the computer .........................................................................................................................................135  
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................136  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................136  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen.........................................................................................136  
Using shortcuts and the address book......................................................................................................................137  
Using fax shortcuts.......................................................................................................................................................................137  
Using the address book..............................................................................................................................................................137  
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................................138  
Changing the fax resolution .....................................................................................................................................................138  
Making a fax lighter or darker ..................................................................................................................................................138  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time..........................................................................................................................................138  
Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)..............................................................................139  
Viewing a fax log...........................................................................................................................................................................139  
Blocking junk faxes.......................................................................................................................................................................139  
Canceling an outgoing fax.............................................................................................................................................140  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning ................................................................................140  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory.....................................................140  
Understanding fax options............................................................................................................................................140  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................140  
Contents  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................140  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................141  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................141  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................141  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................141  
Improving fax quality.......................................................................................................................................................142  
Holding and forwarding faxes......................................................................................................................................142  
Holding faxes..................................................................................................................................................................................142  
Forwarding a fax ...........................................................................................................................................................................143  
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................144  
Scanning to an FTP address..........................................................................................................................................144  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad ..................................................................................................................144  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number....................................................................................................144  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book ......................................................................................................145  
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................145  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................145  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen.............................................................................................................145  
Understanding FTP options..........................................................................................................................................146  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Send As.............................................................................................................................................................................................146  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................147  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................147  
Improving FTP quality.....................................................................................................................................................148  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................149  
Scanning to a computer.................................................................................................................................................149  
Understanding scan profile options..........................................................................................................................150  
Quick Setup.....................................................................................................................................................................................150  
Format Type....................................................................................................................................................................................150  
Compression...................................................................................................................................................................................150  
Default Content.............................................................................................................................................................................150  
Color ..................................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Duplex...............................................................................................................................................................................................151  
JPEG Quality....................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................151  
Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Imaging.......................................................................................................................................................................151  
Scanning to a flash drive................................................................................................................................................152  
Improving scan quality...................................................................................................................................................152  
Understanding printer menus.....................................................153  
Menus list.............................................................................................................................................................................153  
Paper menu.........................................................................................................................................................................154  
Default Source menu...................................................................................................................................................................154  
Paper Size/Type menu ................................................................................................................................................................154  
Configure MP menu.....................................................................................................................................................................157  
Substitute Size menu...................................................................................................................................................................157  
Paper Texture menu ....................................................................................................................................................................158  
Paper Weight menu.....................................................................................................................................................................159  
Paper Loading menu ...................................................................................................................................................................159  
Custom Types menu....................................................................................................................................................................161  
Custom Names menu..................................................................................................................................................................161  
Custom Scan Sizes menu ...........................................................................................................................................................161  
Universal Setup menu.................................................................................................................................................................162  
Reports menu.....................................................................................................................................................................163  
Network/Ports menu.......................................................................................................................................................164  
Active NIC menu............................................................................................................................................................................164  
Standard Network or Network <x> menus .........................................................................................................................164  
SMTP Setup menu ........................................................................................................................................................................166  
Network Reports menu ..............................................................................................................................................................167  
Network Card menu.....................................................................................................................................................................167  
TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................................................168  
IPv6 menu........................................................................................................................................................................................169  
Wireless menu................................................................................................................................................................................169  
AppleTalk menu ............................................................................................................................................................................170  
NetWare menu...............................................................................................................................................................................170  
LexLink menu.................................................................................................................................................................................171  
Standard USB menu.....................................................................................................................................................................172  
Parallel <x> menu.........................................................................................................................................................................173  
Serial <x> menu ............................................................................................................................................................................175  
Security menu....................................................................................................................................................................178  
Miscellaneous menu....................................................................................................................................................................178  
Confidential Print menu.............................................................................................................................................................178  
Disk Wiping menu ........................................................................................................................................................................179  
Security Audit Log menu ...........................................................................................................................................................180  
Set Date/Time menu....................................................................................................................................................................181  
Settings menu....................................................................................................................................................................182  
General Settings menu ...............................................................................................................................................................182  
Copy Settings menu ....................................................................................................................................................................188  
Contents  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................194  
E-mail Settings menu ..................................................................................................................................................................203  
FTP Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................208  
Flash Drive menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................211  
Print Settings..................................................................................................................................................................................216  
Help menu...........................................................................................................................................................................227  
Maintaining the printer.................................................................228  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer............................................................................................................................228  
Cleaning the scanner glass............................................................................................................................................228  
Cleaning the ADF separator rollers.............................................................................................................................229  
Adjusting scanner registration.....................................................................................................................................230  
Storing supplies.................................................................................................................................................................231  
Checking the status of supplies...................................................................................................................................232  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel..................................................................................232  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer..........................................................................................232  
Ordering supplies..............................................................................................................................................................233  
Ordering toner cartridges..........................................................................................................................................................233  
Ordering a photoconductor kit ...............................................................................................................................................233  
Ordering ADF replacement parts............................................................................................................................................234  
Moving the printer to another location....................................................................................................................234  
Shipping the printer.........................................................................................................................................................235  
Administrative support.................................................................236  
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.......................................................................236  
Using the Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................................................236  
Checking the device status............................................................................................................................................236  
Setting up e-mail alerts...................................................................................................................................................236  
Viewing reports..................................................................................................................................................................237  
Restoring the factory default settings.......................................................................................................................237  
Clearing jams...................................................................................238  
Clearing jams......................................................................................................................................................................238  
Understanding jam messages and locations......................................................................................................................238  
200 and 201 paper jams.............................................................................................................................................................239  
202 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................241  
231 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................242  
233 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................244  
234 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................244  
235 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................245  
Contents  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240–249 paper jams ....................................................................................................................................................................245  
250 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................246  
251 paper jam ................................................................................................................................................................................247  
290–294 paper jams ....................................................................................................................................................................248  
Troubleshooting.............................................................................252  
Solving basic printer problems....................................................................................................................................252  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds...................................................................252  
Indicator light blinks red................................................................................................................................................252  
Check the display for error messages....................................................................................................................................252  
Make sure the fax function is set up properly ....................................................................................................................252  
Understanding printer messages................................................................................................................................252  
Answering .......................................................................................................................................................................................252  
Change <src> to <x>...................................................................................................................................................................253  
Check tray <x> connection.......................................................................................................................................................253  
Clock battery ..................................................................................................................................................................................253  
Close front door.............................................................................................................................................................................253  
Close door or insert cartridge...................................................................................................................................................253  
Connect <x>bps............................................................................................................................................................................254  
Disk corrupted ...............................................................................................................................................................................254  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled ...................................................................................................................................................254  
Fax failed..........................................................................................................................................................................................254  
Fax memory full.............................................................................................................................................................................254  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. .............................................................................................254  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator...............................................................................254  
Fax Station Name not set up ....................................................................................................................................................254  
Fax Station Number not set up................................................................................................................................................255  
Insert Tray <x> ...............................................................................................................................................................................255  
Install Tray <x>...............................................................................................................................................................................255  
Invalid PIN........................................................................................................................................................................................255  
Load <src> with <x>....................................................................................................................................................................255  
Load manual feeder with <x>..................................................................................................................................................255  
Memory full, cannot print faxes...............................................................................................................................................256  
Network/Network <x>................................................................................................................................................................256  
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.......................................................................................256  
No answer........................................................................................................................................................................................256  
No dial tone.....................................................................................................................................................................................256  
Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>.......................................................................................................................256  
Queued for sending.....................................................................................................................................................................256  
Remove originals from the scanner ADF..............................................................................................................................256  
Remove packaging material, check <x> ..............................................................................................................................256  
Remove paper from standard output bin............................................................................................................................256  
Replace <x> if restarting job.....................................................................................................................................................257  
Restore Held Jobs? .......................................................................................................................................................................257  
Contents  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Document Too Long.........................................................................................................................................................257  
Scanner ADF Cover Open ..........................................................................................................................................................257  
Securely clearing disk space .....................................................................................................................................................257  
Serial <x>.........................................................................................................................................................................................257  
Set clock ...........................................................................................................................................................................................257  
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator..................................................................................................257  
Some held jobs were not restored .........................................................................................................................................258  
System busy, preparing resources for job. ..........................................................................................................................258  
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s)..................................................................................258  
Unsupported disk .........................................................................................................................................................................258  
Unsupported USB device, please remove ...........................................................................................................................258  
Unsupported USB hub, please remove.................................................................................................................................258  
USB/USB <x> ..................................................................................................................................................................................258  
30 Invalid refill, change toner cartridge................................................................................................................................258  
31 Replace defective cartridge ................................................................................................................................................258  
32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device ..........................................................................................................258  
34 Short paper ...............................................................................................................................................................................258  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature ...........................................................................................259  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job ...................................................................................................................................259  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted..................................................................................................259  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored ......................................................................................259  
38 Memory full...............................................................................................................................................................................259  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed.......................................................................................................259  
50 PPDS font error ........................................................................................................................................................................260  
51 Defective flash detected ......................................................................................................................................................260  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources .............................................................................................260  
53 Unformatted flash detected ...............................................................................................................................................260  
54 Network <x> software error................................................................................................................................................260  
54 Serial option <x> error..........................................................................................................................................................260  
54 Standard network software error......................................................................................................................................261  
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>........................................................................................................................................261  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled....................................................................................................................................................261  
56 Serial port <x> disabled .......................................................................................................................................................261  
56 Standard parallel port disabled .........................................................................................................................................261  
56 Standard USB port disabled................................................................................................................................................262  
56 USB port <x> disabled ..........................................................................................................................................................262  
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored..................................................................................................262  
58 Too many trays attached .....................................................................................................................................................262  
58 Too many flash options installed ......................................................................................................................................262  
59 Incompatible tray <x> ..........................................................................................................................................................263  
61 Remove defective disk..........................................................................................................................................................263  
62 Disk full .......................................................................................................................................................................................263  
63 Unformatted disk....................................................................................................................................................................263  
80 Routine maintenance needed ...........................................................................................................................................263  
84 Replace PC Kit...........................................................................................................................................................................263  
Contents  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 PC Kit life warning...................................................................................................................................................................263  
88 Cartridge low............................................................................................................................................................................263  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low.........................................................................................................................................................264  
88.yy Replace cartridge ..............................................................................................................................................................264  
200–282.yy paper jam.................................................................................................................................................................264  
290-295.yy scanner jam..............................................................................................................................................................264  
293 Replace all originals if restarting job. ............................................................................................................................264  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open ......................................................................................................................................................264  
294 ADF Jam...................................................................................................................................................................................265  
840.01 Scanner Disabled............................................................................................................................................................265  
841-846 Scanner Service Error .................................................................................................................................................265  
900–999 Service <message>....................................................................................................................................................265  
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option....................................................................................................................265  
Solving printing problems.............................................................................................................................................266  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print....................................................................................................................................266  
Error message about reading USB drive appears..............................................................................................................266  
Jobs do not print...........................................................................................................................................................................266  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print...................................................................................................................267  
Job takes longer than expected to print..............................................................................................................................267  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper .................................................................................................268  
Incorrect characters print...........................................................................................................................................................268  
Tray linking does not work........................................................................................................................................................268  
Large jobs do not collate ...........................................................................................................................................................268  
Unexpected page breaks occur...............................................................................................................................................269  
Solving copy problems...................................................................................................................................................269  
Copier does not respond ...........................................................................................................................................................269  
Scanner unit does not close......................................................................................................................................................269  
Poor copy quality..........................................................................................................................................................................270  
Partial document or photo copies..........................................................................................................................................271  
Solving scanner problems.............................................................................................................................................271  
Checking an unresponsive scanner .......................................................................................................................................271  
Scan was not successful .............................................................................................................................................................272  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer............................................................................................................272  
Poor scanned image quality .....................................................................................................................................................272  
Partial document or photo scans............................................................................................................................................273  
Cannot scan from a computer .................................................................................................................................................273  
Solving fax problems.......................................................................................................................................................273  
Caller ID is not shown..................................................................................................................................................................273  
Cannot send or receive a fax.....................................................................................................................................................274  
Can send but not receive faxes................................................................................................................................................275  
Can receive but not send faxes................................................................................................................................................276  
Received fax has poor print quality........................................................................................................................................276  
Solving option problems................................................................................................................................................277  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ....................................................................................277  
Contents  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drawers.............................................................................................................................................................................................278  
Flash memory card.......................................................................................................................................................................278  
Hard disk with adapter................................................................................................................................................................278  
Internal Solutions Port ................................................................................................................................................................278  
Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................................................278  
Solving paper feed problems.......................................................................................................................................279  
Paper frequently jams .................................................................................................................................................................279  
Paper trays.......................................................................................................................................................................................279  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ..............................................................................................................280  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam.........................................................................................280  
Solving print quality problems....................................................................................................................................280  
Isolating print quality problems..............................................................................................................................................280  
Blank pages.....................................................................................................................................................................................281  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges ...........................................................................................................................281  
Clipped images..............................................................................................................................................................................282  
Ghost images..................................................................................................................................................................................282  
Gray background ..........................................................................................................................................................................282  
Incorrect margins..........................................................................................................................................................................283  
Paper curl.........................................................................................................................................................................................283  
Print irregularities .........................................................................................................................................................................284  
Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................................................284  
Solid black or white streaks.......................................................................................................................................................285  
Print is too light .............................................................................................................................................................................285  
Print is too dark..............................................................................................................................................................................286  
Streaked vertical lines .................................................................................................................................................................287  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page ...............................................................................................288  
Toner rubs off.................................................................................................................................................................................288  
Toner specks...................................................................................................................................................................................289  
Transparency print quality is poor..........................................................................................................................................289  
Embedded Web Server does not open.....................................................................................................................289  
Check the network connections .............................................................................................................................................289  
Check the network settings ......................................................................................................................................................290  
Contacting Customer Support.....................................................................................................................................290  
Notices..............................................................................................291  
Product information.........................................................................................................................................................291  
Edition notice.....................................................................................................................................................................291  
Power consumption.........................................................................................................................................................295  
Index.................................................................................................310  
Contents  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical  
connection.  
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.  
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product  
ormakeanyelectricalor cablingconnections,such as thefax feature,power cord,ortelephone,duringalightning  
storm.  
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of  
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
This product uses aprintingprocess that heatstheprint media, andtheheat maycause themediatoreleaseemissions.  
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media  
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.  
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace it only withthe same or anequivalenttype oflithium battery.Do notrecharge, disassemble, orincinerate  
a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to move it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury  
or printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same  
time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.  
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.  
Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when  
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system  
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.  
Safety information  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific  
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not  
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do  
not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture  
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly  
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.  
CAUTION—SHOCKHAZARD:To avoidthe riskofelectricshockwhen cleaningthe exterior ofthe printer, unplug  
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.  
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You  
must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an  
input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies,  
and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see  
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Safety information  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
Thank you for choosing this printer!  
We've worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs.  
To start using your new printer right away, use the setup materials that came with the printer, and then skim the  
User’s Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks. To get the most out of your printer, read the User’s Guide carefully,  
and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site.  
We're committed to delivering performance and value with our printers, and we want to make sure you're satisfied.  
Ifyou do encounter any problems alongthe way, one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted  
to help you get back on track fast. And if you find something we could do better, please let us know. After all, you  
are the reason we do what we do, and your suggestions help us do it better.  
Finding information about the printer  
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
Initial setup instructions:  
Setup documentation—The setup documentation  
came with the printer and is also available on the  
Lexmark Web site at  
• Connecting the printer  
• Installing the printer software  
www.lexmark.com/publications/.  
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:  
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media  
• Loading paper  
User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the  
Software and Documentation CD.  
For updates, check our Web site at  
www.lexmark.com/publications/.  
• Performing printing, copying, scanning, and faxing tasks,  
depending on your printer model  
• Configuring printer settings  
• Viewing and printing documents and photos  
• Setting up and using printer software  
• Setting up and configuring the printer on a network,  
depending on your printer model  
• Caring for and maintaining the printer  
• Troubleshooting and solving problems  
Help using the printer software  
Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software  
program or application, and then click Help.  
Click  
to view context-sensitive information.  
Notes:  
• The Help installs automatically with the printer  
software.  
• The printer software is located in the printer  
Program folder or on the desktop, depending on  
your operating system.  
Learning about the printer  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
The latest supplemental information, updates, and technical  
support:  
Lexmark Support Web site—support.lexmark.com  
Note: Select your region, and then select your product  
• Documentation  
• Driver downloads  
• Live chat support  
• E-mail support  
to view the appropriate support site.  
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for  
yourregionorcountrycanbefoundontheSupportWeb  
site or on the printed warranty that came with your  
printer.  
• Telephone support  
Record the following information (located on the store  
receipt and the back of the printer), and have it ready  
when you contact support so that they may serve you  
faster:  
• Machine Type number  
• Serial number  
• Date purchased  
• Store where purchased  
Warranty information  
Warranty information varies by country or region:  
• In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty  
included with this printer, or at  
support.lexmark.com.  
• Rest of the world—See the printed warranty that  
came with your printer.  
Printer configurations  
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.  
Learning about the printer  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic model  
3
2
1
8
7
6
4
5
Front door release button  
Printer control panel  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standard exit bin with overhead light  
Paper stop  
Standard 250-sheet tray  
Multipurpose feeder door  
Front door  
Learning about the printer  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
System board locks  
Locking device  
Ethernet port  
USB port  
Note: Use this USB port to connect the printer to the computer.  
Fax wall connection port  
5
6
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.  
Fax telephone connection port  
Note: The Fax ports are present only when a fax card is installed.  
Rear door  
7
8
Power switch  
9
Printer power cord socket  
USB peripheral port  
10  
11 Removable protective plate  
Note: The protective plate is removed when internal options are installed.  
Selecting a location for the printer  
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install  
any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:  
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.  
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.  
Learning about the printer  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Keep the printer:  
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators  
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations  
– Clean, dry, and free of dust  
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:  
1
2
5
3
4
Top  
254 mm (10 in.)  
1
2
3
4
5
Right Side 203 mm (8 in.)  
Rear  
305 mm (12 in.)  
203 mm (8 in.)  
Front  
Left Side 76 mm (3 in.)  
Basic functions of the scanner  
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:  
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.  
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.  
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.  
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.  
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).  
Note: The fax function is available on selected printer models only.  
Learning about the printer  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.  
Using the ADF  
The ADF can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. If duplex settings are selected, the ADF scans both sides  
of the page automatically. When using the ADF:  
• Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.  
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.  
• Scan sizes from 125 x 127 mm (4.92 x 5.0 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).  
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).  
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Using the scanner glass  
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:  
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).  
• Copy books up to 25.3-mm (1-in.) thick.  
Learning about the printer  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding the printer control panel  
1
2
1
2
ABC  
3
DEF  
4
GHI  
5
JKL  
6
MNO  
7
PQRS  
8
TUV  
9
WXYZ  
0
#
*
3
4
5
8
6
7
Item  
Description  
Display  
Keypad  
1
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.  
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.  
1
2
2
ABC  
3
DEF  
4
GHI  
5
JKL  
6
MNO  
7
PQRS  
8
TUV  
9
WXYZ  
0
#
*
Dial Pause  
3
4
• Press  
a Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).  
• From the home screen, press to redial a fax number.  
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the  
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing causes an error beep.  
to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field,  
Back  
In the Copy menu, press to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count.  
Thedefaultvalueof 1 appears if the entire numberis deleted bypressing  
numerous times.  
In the Fax Destination List, press  
manually. You can also press  
deleted, another press of  
to delete the right-most digit of a number entered  
to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is  
causes the cursor to move up one line.  
In the E-mail Destination List, press  
to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the  
character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.  
5
Home  
Press  
to return to the home screen.  
Learning about the printer  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Item  
6
Description  
Start  
• Press  
to initiate the current job indicated on the display.  
to start a copy job with the default settings.  
• From the home screen, press  
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.  
Indicator light  
Indicates the printer status:  
7
8
• Off—The power is off.  
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.  
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.  
• Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.  
Stop  
Stops all printer activity  
A list of options is offered once Stoppedappears on the display.  
Understanding the home screen  
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows a basic screen which is referred  
to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to  
open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.  
Note: Buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on home screen customization settings.  
1
2
8
Ready  
Touch any button to begin.  
7
6
5
4
3
Display item  
Description  
Copy  
Opens the Copy menus  
1
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on  
the keypad.  
E-mail  
Menus  
FTP  
Opens the E-mail menus  
2
3
4
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Readystate.  
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus  
Learning about the printer  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display item  
Description  
Status message bar  
5
• Shows the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.  
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.  
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer  
can continue processing, such as Close door.  
Status/Supplies  
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring  
intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message,  
including how to clear it.  
6
7
8
Tips  
Fax  
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitiveHelp featurewithin the display touch  
screens.  
Opens the Fax menus  
Other buttons may appear on the home screen, such as:  
Display item  
Description  
Release Held Faxes  
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold timepreviously  
set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.  
Search Held Jobs  
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:  
• User names for held or confidential print jobs  
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs  
• Profile names  
• Bookmark container or job names  
• USB container or job names for supported extensions only  
Held Jobs  
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs  
Lock Device  
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and Device Lockout  
Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been set.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN locks the  
printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).  
Unlock Device  
This button appears on the screenwhenthe printer is locked. Theprintercontrolpanel  
buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it appears.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct PIN unlocks the  
printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).  
Using the touch-screen buttons  
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.  
Learning about the printer  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample touch screen  
Button  
Function  
Home  
Returns to the home screen  
Down arrow  
Opens an options screen  
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order  
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order  
Left arrow  
Right arrow  
Back  
Scrolls left  
Scrolls right  
Navigates back to the previous screen  
Learning about the printer  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other touch-screen buttons  
Button  
Function  
Submit  
Saves a value as the new default setting  
Down arrow  
Up arrow  
Moves down to the next screen  
Moves up to the next screen  
Unselected radio button  
Selected radio button  
Cancel Jobs  
This is an unselected radio button. Theradiobutton is grayto showitis unselected.  
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.  
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,  
Fax, and Network.  
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only  
three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access  
information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow  
appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.  
Continue  
Touch this button to accept a selection or to clear messages, and then proceed  
with the job.  
Learning about the printer  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Function  
Cancel  
• Cancels an action or a selection  
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen  
Select  
Opens the next related menu or menu item  
Features  
Feature  
Description  
Menu trail line:  
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts as a  
trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact  
location within the menus.  
MenusSettingsCopy Settings  
Number of Copies  
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.  
TheNumber ofCopies is notunderlined since thisis thecurrentscreen. Ifyoutouch  
an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies  
is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does notbecome thedefault  
setting.  
Attendance message alert  
If an attendance message occurs which affects a function, such as copy or fax, then  
a solid red exclamation point appears over the function button on the home  
screen, and the red indicator light blinks.  
Learning about the printer  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
Installing internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this  
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.  
Available internal options  
• Memory cards  
– Printer memory  
– Flash memory  
– Fonts  
• Firmware cards  
– Bar Code and Forms  
– IPDS and SCS/TNe  
– PrintCryptionTM  
• Printer hard disk  
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)  
– RS-232-C Serial ISP  
– Parallel 1284-B ISP  
– MarkNetTM N8150 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP  
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP  
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP  
• MarkNet N8110 V-34 Fax Card  
Additional printer setup  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessing the system board to install internal options  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Loosen the screws on the back of the system board a quarter turn.  
Additional printer setup  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Lift the front of the scanner unit to open the system board.  
3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.  
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
Flash memory or firmware card connectors  
Fax card connector  
1
2
3
4
Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector  
Memory card connector  
Additional printer setup  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a memory card  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory  
card:  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Open the memory card connector latches.  
Additional printer setup  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges in the connector.  
Notches  
Ridges  
1
2
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.  
Note: After the memory card is installed, make sure the memory card connector latches return to the latched  
vertical position and are secure against the card.  
6 Release the system board access latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.  
7 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it  
is moved.  
Additional printer setup  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a flash memory or firmware card  
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be  
installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.  
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the card.  
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.  
Additional printer setup  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.  
1
2
Plastic pins  
Metal pins  
4 Push the card firmly into place.  
Notes:  
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.  
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.  
5 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.  
Additional printer setup  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if  
it is moved.  
Installing an Internal Solutions Port  
Thesystemboard supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional connectivity  
options.  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.  
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.  
Additional printer setup  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.  
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To  
remove the hard disk:  
a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer  
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch  
before pulling the cable out.  
Additional printer setup  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.  
c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.  
Additional printer setup  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and  
then remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.  
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.  
Additional printer setup  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps  
into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system  
board.  
6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that  
any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.  
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.  
Additional printer setup  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Insert the long thumbscrew, into the hole closest to the white connector, and turn it clockwise enough to hold  
the ISP in place. Do not tighten the thumbscrew at this time.  
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.  
10 Tighten the long thumbscrew.  
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.  
11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
Additional printer setup  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,  
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 43.  
13 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.  
14 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if it  
is moved.  
Additional printer setup  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a printer hard disk  
The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without a Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.  
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.  
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.  
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.  
Additional printer setup  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:  
a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk  
mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.  
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer  
hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.  
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
Additional printer setup  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board:  
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on  
the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.  
Additional printer setup  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.  
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
4 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.  
Additional printer setup  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if  
it is moved.  
Installing a fax card  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2 Unpack the fax card.  
Additional printer setup  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.  
2
1
4 Insert the fax card, and then tighten the two screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.  
Additional printer setup  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
6 Release the latch, and then close the system board door by lowering the scanner.  
7 Push in on the screws while rotating them clockwise a quarter turn to lock the system board into place.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the system board is locked to prevent possible damage to the printer if  
it is moved.  
Additional printer setup  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing hardware options  
Installing a 250- or 550-sheet drawer  
The printer supports one optional drawer; you can install a 250- or 550-sheet drawer.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
1 Unpack the drawer, and then remove any packing material from the outside of the drawer.  
2 Remove the tray from the support unit.  
1
2
Support unit  
Tray  
1
2
3 Remove any packing material and tape from inside the tray.  
4 Insert the tray into the support unit.  
5 Place the drawer in the location chosen for the printer.  
Additional printer setup  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6 Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.  
Attaching cables  
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, or to the network using an Ethernet cable.  
Be sure to match the following:  
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer  
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port  
Additional printer setup  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USB port  
1
2
Ethernet port  
Verifying printer setup  
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up  
correctly by printing the following:  
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed  
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed  
correctly. Remove the option and install it again.  
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup  
page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing  
configuration.  
Printing a menu settings page  
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.  
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory  
default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings  
as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,  
and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see “Restoring the factory default settings” on page 237.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.  
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.  
Additional printer setup  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing a network setup page  
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page  
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Network Setup Page.  
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.  
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”  
If Status is “Not Connected,” then the LAN drop may not be active, the network cable may be malfunctioning, or,  
if you have a wireless printer model, the wireless network may not be configured properly. Consult a system  
support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.  
Setting up the printer software  
Installing printer software  
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically  
installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:  
For Windows users  
1 Close all open software programs.  
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install.  
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Close all open software applications.  
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.  
4 Double-click the Install icon.  
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Using the World Wide Web  
1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
2 From the Drivers & Downloads menu, click Driver Finder.  
3 Select your printer, and then select your operating system.  
4 Download the driver and install the printer software.  
Additional printer setup  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Updating available options in the printer driver  
Once the printersoftware and any optionsare installed, itmay be necessary to manually add the optionsinthe printer  
driver to make them available for print jobs.  
For Windows users  
1 Do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
a Click  
.
b Click Control Panel.  
c Click Hardware and Sound.  
d Click Printers.  
In Windows XP  
a Click Start.  
b Click Printers and Faxes.  
In Windows 2000  
a Click Start.  
b Click Settings Printers.  
2 Select the printer.  
3 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.  
4 Click the Install Options tab.  
5 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.  
6 Click Apply.  
For Macintosh users  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.  
4 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.  
5 Click OK.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.  
Additional printer setup  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.  
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.  
Setting up wireless printing  
Note: Wireless printing is not standard on all printer models.  
Follow these steps to set up your printer  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: See the enclosed Safety Sheet before making any cable or electrical  
connection.  
Note: Do not connect cables until instructed to do so.  
1 Set up the printer hardware. For more information, see the Setup Guide.  
2 Follow the instructions for your operating system:  
• Windows—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and  
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)” on page 56.  
• Macintosh—See “Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network” on page 55 and  
“Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)” on page 59.  
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless  
network  
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.  
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.  
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.  
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.  
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not  
sure which channel to select.  
Additional printer setup  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:  
– WEP key  
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently  
in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.  
or  
– WPA or WPA2 passphrase  
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be  
set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the  
network.  
– No security  
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.  
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.  
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:  
• Authentication type  
• Inner authentication type  
• 802.1X username and password  
• Certificates  
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)  
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:  
• A wireless card is installed in your printer.  
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.  
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.  
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properlygroundedelectrical outlet,and then turn theprinter  
on.  
Additional printer setup  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.  
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen.  
2 From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.  
3 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.  
4 Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.  
5 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.  
6 If Fax is enabled, then type in your Fax Station name and touch Enter. For more information on fax station name  
and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.  
7 If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.  
8 If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more  
information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect  
E-mail.  
9 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.  
Additional printer setup  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
11 Click Install Printer and Software.  
12 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.  
13 Select Suggested, and then click Next.  
14 Click Wireless Network Attach.  
15 Remove the label covering the USB port on the back of the printer.  
16 Connect the cables in the following order:  
a Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.  
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable  
so you can print wirelessly.  
Additional printer setup  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b If you plan to set up fax now, then connect the fax cables. See the User's Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD for help deciding how to connect the cables.  
17 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software installation.  
Note: Basicis the recommended path to choose. Choose Advancedonly if you want to customize your  
installation or if your network uses 802.1x security.  
18 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 10 through 14 for each  
computer.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)  
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:  
• A wireless card is installed in your printer.  
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.  
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.  
Prepare to configure the printer  
1 Locate the printerMACaddress on the sheet that came withthe printer. Write the last sixdigitsof the MACaddress  
in the space provided:  
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___  
2 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properlygroundedelectrical outlet,and then turn theprinter  
on.  
3 From the printer control panel, select your language and country or region, and then touch Continue.  
4 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.  
Additional printer setup  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Deselect any function you plan to set up later, such as Fax or E-mail, and then touch Continue.  
6 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.  
7 If Fax is enabled, type in your Fax Station name, and then touch Enter. For more information on fax station name  
and number, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect Fax.  
8 If Fax is enabled, enter the Fax station (phone) number for this printer, and then touch Continue.  
9 If E-mail is enabled, type in the Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address, and then touch Enter. For more  
information on enabling e-mail, see your system support person; or touch Back to go back and deselect  
E-mail.  
10 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.  
Enter the printer information  
1 Access the AirPort options.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Network.  
c Click AirPort.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.  
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.  
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.  
Additional printer setup  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC  
address located on the MAC address sheet.  
3 Open the Safari browser.  
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.  
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.  
Note: The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.3, but is now called Bonjour by Apple  
Computer.  
6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information  
is stored.  
Configure the printer for wireless access  
1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.  
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.  
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.  
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.  
5 Click Submit.  
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Network.  
c Click AirPort.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.  
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.  
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.  
7 From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.  
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly  
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and  
create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
1 Install a PPD file on the computer:  
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.  
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.  
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.  
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.  
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the  
agreement.  
Additional printer setup  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.  
g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
h Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All necessary software is installed on the computer.  
i
Click Restart when installation is complete.  
2 Add the printer:  
a For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Select the printer from the list.  
5 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.  
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.  
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
b For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Click AppleTalk.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go >Applications.  
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.  
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.  
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.  
6 Click More Printers.  
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
9 Select the printer from the list.  
10 Click Add.  
Additional printer setup  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the printer on a wired network  
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber  
optic network connections.  
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:  
• You have completed the initial setup of the printer.  
• The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.  
For Windows users  
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.  
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then launch the CD manually:  
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.  
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
2 Click Install Printer and Software.  
3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.  
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.  
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Custom and follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.  
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.  
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.  
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.  
Notes:  
• If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, then click Add Port and follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.  
2 Print the network setup page from the printer. For information on printing a network setup page, see “Printing  
a network setup page” on page 53.  
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you  
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
Additional printer setup  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.  
a Install a PPD file on the computer:  
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.  
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.  
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.  
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.  
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the  
agreement.  
6 Select a Destination, and then click Continue.  
7 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
8 Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.  
9 Click Restart when installation is complete.  
b Add the printer:  
• For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Select the printer from the list.  
5 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
4 From the Printer List, click Add.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Click AppleTalk.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Additional printer setup  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 From the Printer List, click Add.  
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.  
6 Click More Printers.  
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
9 Select the printer from the list.  
10 Click Add.  
Note: If the printer does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact  
your system support person for assistance.  
Changing port settings after installing a new  
network Internal Solutions Port  
When a new network Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on  
computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All  
computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network.  
Notes:  
• If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the  
computer configurations.  
• If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by  
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.  
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the  
wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection  
remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. This  
can be fixed by disconnecting the wired connection, turning the printer off, and then turning the printer back  
on again.  
For Windows users  
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.  
2 Do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
a Click  
.
b Click Control Panel.  
c Under Hardware and Sound, click Printer.  
In Windows XP  
a Click Start.  
b Click Printers and Faxes.  
Additional printer setup  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In Windows 2000  
a Click Start.  
b Click Settings Printers.  
3 Locate the printer that has changed.  
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.  
4 Right-click the printer.  
5 Click Properties.  
6 Click the Ports tab.  
7 Locate the port in the list, and then select it.  
8 Click Configure Port.  
9 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network  
setup page you printed in step 1.  
10 Click OK, and then click Close.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.  
2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you  
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
3 Add the printer:  
• For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Print & Fax.  
c Click +.  
d Select the printer from the list.  
e Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Utilities.  
c Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
d From the Printer List, click Add.  
e Select the printer from the list.  
f
Click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Print & Fax.  
Additional printer setup  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c Click +.  
d Click AppleTalk.  
e Select the printer from the list.  
f
Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Utilities.  
c Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
d From the Printer List, click Add.  
e Choose the Default Browser tab.  
f
Click More Printers.  
g From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
h From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
i
j
Select the printer from the list.  
Click Add.  
Setting up serial printing  
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing,  
it is the preferred option when thereis a greatdeal ofdistance between the printer and computer or when an interface  
with a better transfer rate is not available.  
After installing the serial port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate.  
Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer.  
1 Set the parameters in the printer:  
a From the printer control panel, touch  
b Touch Network/Ports.  
c Touch Serial1.  
.
d Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.  
e Save the new settings.  
f
Print a menu settings page.  
2 Install the printer driver:  
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.  
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then launch the CD manually:  
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.  
2 In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
b Click Install Printer and Software.  
c Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.  
d Click Custom.  
e Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.  
f
Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu.  
Additional printer setup  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
g Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.  
h Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.  
i
Makesure thecorrectportis availableunder SelectComponents.Thisistheportwheretheserial cableattaches  
to the computer. If the correct port is not available, select the port under the Select Port menu, and then click  
Add Port.  
j
Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window. Click Add Port to finish adding  
the port.  
k Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.  
Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.  
l
m Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.  
3 Set the COM port parameters:  
After the printer driverisinstalled, you must set the serial parameters in the communications(COM)port assigned  
to the printer driver.  
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.  
a Open the Device Manager:  
In Windows Vista  
1 Click  
.
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click System and Maintenance.  
4 Click System.  
5 Click Device Manager.  
In Windows XP  
1 Click Start.  
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click Performance and Maintenance.  
4 Click System.  
5 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.  
In Windows 2000  
1 Click Start.  
2 Click Settings Control Panel.  
3 Click System.  
4 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.  
b Click + to expand the list of available ports.  
c Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).  
d Click Properties.  
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.  
Look for the printer settings under the Serial heading on the menu settings page you printed earlier.  
Additional printer setup  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
f
Click OK, and then close all the windows.  
g Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.  
Additional printer setup  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental  
impact  
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact  
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and  
provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:  
• The Notices chapter  
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycling  
Byselectingcertain printersettingsortasks,you may be able toreduce yourprinter'simpactevenfurther.Thischapter  
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.  
Saving paper and toner  
Using recycled paper  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically  
for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled  
paper and other office papers” on page 91.  
Conserving supplies  
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing, copying, or  
receiving faxes. You can:  
Use both sides of the paper  
You cancontrolwhetherprintappearsononeortwosidesof thepaperfora printeddocument,a copy,oranincoming  
fax. For more information, see:  
• “Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 96  
• “Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 108  
• “Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)” on page 139  
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper from  
the Print dialog.  
To copy two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper, see  
“Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet” on page 110.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Choose scanning  
You can avoid making a paper output of a document or photograph by scanning it and then saving it to a computer  
program, application, or flash drive. For more information, see:  
• “Sending an e-mail using the touch screen” on page 118  
• “Scanning to a computer” on page 149  
• “Scanning to a flash drive” on page 152  
Check your first draft for accuracy  
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:  
• Use the Lexmark preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog, the Lexmark Toolbar, or the printer  
display, to see what the document will look like before you print it.  
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.  
Avoid paper jams  
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 78.  
Saving energy  
Using Eco-Mode  
Use Eco-Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.  
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an Eco-Mode setting.  
Choose  
To  
Energy  
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.  
• Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the  
first page is printed.  
• The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity.  
• When the printer enters Power Saver mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin  
lights are turned off.  
• The scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.  
Paper  
• Enable the automatic duplex feature  
• Turn off print log features.  
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.  
Off  
Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the  
performance specifications for your printer.  
To select an Eco-Mode setting:  
1 On the home screen, touch  
2 Touch Settings.  
.
3 Touch General Settings.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4 Touch Eco-Mode.  
5 Touch the arrows to select a setting.  
6 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
Adjusting Power Saver  
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode.  
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.  
3 Click Timeouts.  
4 In the Power Saver box, type in the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Power Saver  
mode.  
5 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeoutsappears.  
6 Touch Timeouts.  
7 Touch the arrows next to Power Saver Modeto select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait  
before it enters Power Saver mode.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the brightness of the display  
To save energy, or if you are having trouble reading your display, you can adjust the brightness of the display.  
Available settings range from 20–100 . The factory default setting is 100.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.  
3 In the Screen Brightness box, type in the brightness percentage you want for your home screen.  
4 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightnessappears.  
6 Touch the arrows to select a setting.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Setting the standard exit bin light  
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.  
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.  
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.  
The factory default setting for Power Saver is Dim.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.  
3 Click Output Lighting.  
4 From theNormal/StandbyMode list,selectthelightsettingthestandard exitbinwillusewhen in Readyor Standby  
mode.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 From the Power Saver list, select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in Power Saver mode.  
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 72.  
6 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Settings, and then touch General Settings.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Output Lightingappears.  
5 Touch Output Lighting.  
6 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Modeto select the light settings the standard exit bin will  
use when in Ready or Standby mode.  
7 Touch the arrow button next to Power Saverto select the light setting the standard exit bin will use when in  
Power Saver mode.  
Note: For more information on Power Saver mode, see “Adjusting Power Saver” on page 72.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Recycling  
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more  
information, see:  
• The Notices chapter  
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment  
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycling  
Recycling Lexmark products  
To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling:  
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country from the list.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Recycling Lexmark packaging  
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are  
transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose  
of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.  
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Expanded polystyrene (EPS) foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist.  
Facilities may not exist in your area. For information on EPS foam recycling locations:  
1 Visit EPS Recycling International's Web site at www.epsrecycling.org/pages/intcon.html.  
2 Select your country or region from the list, and then click the links or use the contact information provided.  
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the  
box.  
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling  
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making  
it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred  
percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used  
to return the cartridges are also recycled.  
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge  
and use the pre-paid shipping label. You can also:  
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country from the list.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Reducing printer noise  
Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.  
Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting.  
Choose  
To  
On  
Reduce printer noise.  
• You may notice a reduction in processing speed.  
• Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to  
print. You may notice a short delay before the first page  
is printed.  
• Fans run at a reduced speed or are turned off.  
• If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are  
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax  
speaker and ringer.  
Off  
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the  
performance specifications for your printer.  
To select a Quiet Mode setting:  
1 On the home screen, touch  
2 Touch Settings.  
.
3 Touch General Settings.  
4 Touch Quiet Mode.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5 Touch the arrows to select a setting.  
6 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
This section explains how to load the trays and feeders. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting  
the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type  
The Paper Size setting for the standard 250 tray and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper  
size menu. The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all  
trays that do not contain plain paper.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.  
6 Touch Submit.  
7 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Configuring Universal paper settings  
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer  
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper  
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:  
• Units of measure (millimeters or inches)  
• Portrait Width  
• Portrait Height  
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
Specify the Universal Paper Size measurement  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setupappears, and then touch Universal Setup.  
5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.  
6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.  
7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 Touch Submit to save your selection.  
Submitting Selectionappears, followed by the Paper menu.  
9 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Avoiding jams  
The following hints can help you avoid jams:  
Paper tray recommendations  
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the paper tray.  
• Do not remove the paper tray while the printer is printing.  
• Do not load the paper tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.  
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.  
• Make sure the guides in the paper tray or the manual feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too  
tightly against the paper or envelopes.  
• Push the paper tray in firmly after loading paper.  
Paper recommendations  
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.  
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.  
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.  
• Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.  
Loading trays  
1 Pull the tray completely out.  
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2 Squeeze and slide the guides to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.  
For long paper like A4 or legal, squeeze and slide the length guide backwards to accommodate the length of  
paper you are loading.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are loading A6-size paper:  
a Squeeze and slide the length guide toward the center of the tray to the A5 size position.  
b Raise the A6 backstop.  
Notes:  
• The standard tray accommodates only 150 sheets of A6-size paper. Notice the maximum fill line on the A6  
backstop which indicates the maximum height for loading A6-size paper. Do not try to overload the tray.  
• A6-size paper cannot be loaded in the optional tray.  
Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.  
3 Flex a stack of paper back and forth to loosen the sheets, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
4 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray as shown with the recommended print side facedown.  
Note: The maximum fill line on the width guide indicates the maximum height for loading paper. Do not load  
A6-size paper to the maximum fill line; the tray holds only 150 sheets of A6-size paper.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Maximum fill line  
1
Load letterhead with the top edge of the sheet toward the front of the tray and the design facedown.  
LETTERHEAD  
5 Squeeze and slide the guides to lightly touch the side of the stack.  
1
2
Loading paper and specialty media  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Insert the tray.  
7 If the paper type you loaded differs from the type that was previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper  
Size/Type setting on the Paper menu.  
Using the multipurpose feeder  
You may want to use the multipurpose feeder when you print on different sizes and types of papers or specialty  
media, such as card stock, transparencies, paper labels, and envelopes. You may also want to use the multipurpose  
feeder for single-page print jobs on letterhead or on other specialty media you do not keep in a tray.  
Opening the multipurpose feeder  
1 Grasp the handle, and pull the multipurpose feeder door down.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Grasp the raised handle, and pull the extension forward.  
3 Grasp the handle, and pull the extension so it flips forward.  
4 Guide the extension down gently so the multipurpose feeder is extended fully and open.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the multipurpose feeder  
1 Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide, and move the guides out fully.  
2 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.  
• Flex sheets of paper or paper labels back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease  
the paper or labels. Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
• Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Note: Avoid touching the print side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level  
surface.  
Note: Fanning prevents the edges of envelopes from sticking together. It also helps them feed properly to  
avoid jams. Do not fold or crease envelopes.  
3 Load the paper or specialty media.  
Notes:  
• Do not force any paper into the multipurpose feeder. Overfilling may cause jams.  
• Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or specialty media under the stack height limiters  
which are located on the guides.  
• Loadpaper,transparencies,andcardstockwiththerecommendedprintsidefaceupandthetopedgeentering  
the printer first. For more information on loading transparencies, see the packaging the transparencies came  
in.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Load letterhead with the logo faceup and the top edge entering the printer first.  
• Load envelopes with the flap side down and the stamp location in the position shown. The stamp and address  
are shown to illustrate the proper orientation for loading envelopes.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings,  
or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.  
4 Squeeze the tab located on the right width guide to adjust the guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Slide the paper gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop. Paper should lie flat in the  
multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.  
6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.  
Linking and unlinking trays  
Linking trays  
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next  
linked tray. The Size and Type settings for all trays must be set from the Paper menu.  
To set the paper type or size:  
1 On the home screen, touch  
2 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
3 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder Size or MP  
Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.  
4 Touch the right or left arrows to select the same size paper from all paper sources to be linked.  
5 Touch the right or left arrows to select the same type paper from all paper sources to be linked.  
Note: When the Size and Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.  
6 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
7 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Unlinking trays  
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:  
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)  
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked  
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.  
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)  
Paper Size settings are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper  
loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be  
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.  
Assigning a custom paper type name  
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears.  
6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type.  
7 Touch Submit.  
Changing a Custom Type <x> name  
You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVision ProfessionalTM to define a name other than Custom Type <x>  
for each of the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display  
the new name instead of Custom Type <x>.  
To change a Custom Type <x> name from the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Default Settings, click Paper Menu.  
4 Click Custom Names.  
5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.  
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size/Type  
menus.  
6 Click Submit.  
7 Click Custom Types.  
Custom Typesappears, followed by your custom name.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name.  
9 Click Submit.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
Paper guidelines  
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of  
the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.  
Paper characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating  
new paper stock.  
Note: For detailed information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark  
Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.  
Weight  
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) grain long paper. For papersmaller than 182 x257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier  
paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur  
after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in  
hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause  
feeding problems.  
Smoothness  
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper  
is too smooth, then itcan cause paper feeding or print qualityissues. Always use paper between 100and 300Sheffield  
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.  
Moisture content  
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.  
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that  
can degrade its performance.  
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to  
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different  
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.  
Grain direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of  
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m2, grain  
short is recommended.  
Fiber content  
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the  
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper  
containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.  
For detailed information on paper with recycled fiber content, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on  
page 91.  
Unacceptable paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,  
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper  
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 2.3 mm  
( 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms  
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.  
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers  
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)  
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
• Multiple-part forms or documents  
Selecting paper  
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.  
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:  
• Always use new, undamaged paper.  
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on  
the paper package.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.  
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.  
Using recycled paper and other office papers  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically  
for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study  
demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However,  
no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Lexmark consistentlytests itsprinterswith recycled paper(20–100%post-consumerwaste)and a varietyoftestpaper  
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found  
no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines  
apply to recycled paper.  
• Low moisture content (4–5%)  
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)  
Note:Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher  
papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in  
laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.  
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)  
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed  
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper  
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for  
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper  
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause  
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing  
conditions).  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead  
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:  
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 weight paper.  
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Use papers printed with heat-resistantinks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand  
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected  
by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.  
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.  
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
Storing paper  
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:  
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label  
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity  
between 40 and 60%.  
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.  
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.  
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights  
Thefollowingtables provideinformation onstandardandoptional paper sources andthetypesofpapertheysupport.  
Note: For an unlisted paper size, configure a Universal Paper Size.  
For information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com/publications.  
Paper sizes supported by the printer  
Paper size  
Dimensions  
Standard  
250-sheet tray or 550-sheet  
Optional 250- Multipurpose  
Duplex path  
feeder  
tray  
A4  
210 x 297 mm  
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)  
A5  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
X
X
X
A61  
105 x 148 mm  
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)  
X
182 x 257 mm  
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)  
JIS B5  
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in.)  
Letter  
Legal  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
Executive  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Folio  
184 x 267 mm  
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)  
X
216 x 340 mm  
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)  
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
Statement  
Universal2  
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
X
X3  
76.2 x 127 mm  
(3 x 5 in.) up to  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
98 x 191 mm  
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)  
7 3/4 Envelope  
(Monarch)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
98 x 225 mm  
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)  
9 Envelope  
1 A6 is supported only for grain long papers.  
2 If a paper size you want to use is not listed, configure a Universal paper size. For more information, see “Configuring  
Universal paper settings” on page 77.  
3 Universal paper size has limited support in the duplex path for paper sizes 210 x 279 mm (8.3 x 11 in.) or larger.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper size  
Dimensions  
Standard  
250-sheet tray or 550-sheet  
Optional 250- Multipurpose  
Duplex path  
feeder  
tray  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
Other Envelope  
105 x 241 mm  
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
110 x 220 mm  
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)  
162 x 229 mm  
(6.4 x 9 in.)  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)  
229 x 356 mm  
(9 x 14 in.)  
1 A6 is supported only for grain long papers.  
2 If a paper size you want to use is not listed, configure a Universal paper size. For more information, see “Configuring  
Universal paper settings” on page 77.  
3 Universal paper size has limited support in the duplex path for paper sizes 210 x 279 mm (8.3 x 11 in.) or larger.  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer  
The printer engine and the duplex path support 60–90 g/m2 (16–24 lb) paper weights. The multipurpose feeder  
supports 60–163 g/m2 (16–43 lb) paper weights.  
Paper type  
Standard  
250-sheet tray  
Optional 250- or Multipurpose  
550-sheet tray feeder  
Manual feeder  
Duplex path  
Paper  
• Plain  
• Light  
• Heavy  
• Rough/Cotton  
• Recycled  
• Custom  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Card stock  
Glossy paper  
X
X
X
X
X
1 Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to print no  
more than 20 pages of paper labels a month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-sided labels are not supported.  
2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper type  
Standard  
250-sheet tray  
Optional 250- or Multipurpose  
550-sheet tray feeder  
Manual feeder  
Duplex path  
X
Paper labels1  
Transparencies  
Envelopes  
(smooth)2  
X
X
X
1 Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to print no  
more than 20 pages of paper labels a month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-sided labels are not supported.  
2 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed on a table facedown.  
Paper capacities  
The capacities of the trays and the multipurpose feeder are based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.  
Load up to  
Notes  
Tray 1  
Note: Vinyl, pharmacy, or dual-sided labels are not supported. Use  
paper labels only. Single-sided paper labels designed for laser  
printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to  
print no more than 20 pages of paper labels per month.  
250 sheets of paper  
150 sheets of A6-size paper  
50 paper labels  
50 transparencies  
Tray 2  
Note: Only one optional drawer may be installed on the printer at  
a time. The maximum amount of paper that can be loaded  
depends on whether you have an optional 250- or 550-sheet tray.  
250 or 550 sheets of paper  
50 paper labels  
Multipurpose feeder  
50 sheets of paper  
15 paper labels  
Note: Feed paper into the multipurpose feeder only to the point  
where its leading edge can contact the paper guides. Do not force  
the paper into the feeder.  
10 transparencies  
10 sheets of card stock  
7 envelopes  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing  
Printing a document  
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.  
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Do one of the following:  
For Windows users  
a With a document open, click File Print.  
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded  
paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
c Click OK, and then click Print.  
For Macintosh users  
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.  
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Click OK.  
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or  
select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
3 Click Print.  
Printing on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
In order to save paper, you can print a multiple-page document on both sides of the paper.  
1 On the home screen, touch Menus, and then touch Settings.  
2 Touch the down arrows until Print Settings appears.  
3 Touch Print Settings.  
4 Touch Finishing Menu.  
5 Touch the Sides (Duplex) arrows until 2 sidedappears.  
Printing  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
7 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Printing on specialty media  
Tips on using letterhead  
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.  
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
• Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:  
– “Loading trays” on page 78  
– “Using the multipurpose feeder” on page 82  
Tips on using transparencies  
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on transparencies:  
• Feed transparencies from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.  
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure  
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting,  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.  
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.  
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
• We recommend Lexmark part number 12A5010 for A4-size transparencies and Lexmark part number 70X7240  
for letter-size transparencies.  
Tips on using envelopes  
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on envelopes:  
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the  
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Note: Envelopes can be printed at a temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Envelope Weight is set to Heavy and  
Envelope Texture is set to Rough. Select these settings using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer  
control panel Paper menu.  
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)  
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed  
90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.  
• Use only new envelopes.  
Printing  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:  
– Have excessive curl or twist  
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
– Have an interlocking design  
– Have postage stamps attached  
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
– Have bent corners  
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.  
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.  
Tips on using labels  
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
Note: Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are supported for occasional use. It is recommended to  
print 20 or fewer pages of paper labels a month. Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-sided labels are not supported.  
When printing on labels:  
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:  
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to  
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.  
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure  
without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.  
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.  
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets  
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.  
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.  
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.  
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)  
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.  
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,  
and use a non-oozing adhesive.  
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.  
Tips on using card stock  
Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,  
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before  
buying large quantities.  
Printing  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
When printing on card stock:  
• Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.  
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.  
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or  
other paper handling problems.  
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F)  
without releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting  
introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.  
• Use grain short card stock when possible.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs  
Holding jobs in the printer  
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you  
start the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called  
held jobs.  
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to  
process additional held jobs.  
Job type  
Description  
Confidential  
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN from  
the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The job is held  
in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and  
choose to print or delete the job.  
Verify  
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the  
remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy to see  
if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies are  
printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.  
Reserve  
Repeat  
WhenyousendaReserveprintjob, theprinterdoes notprintthejobimmediately.  
Itstores thejobinmemorysoyoucanprintthejoblater. Thejobisheldinmemory  
until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.  
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of the  
job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later. You  
can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.  
Other types of held jobs include:  
• Profiles from various sources including Lexmark Document Solutions Suite (LDSS)  
• Forms from a kiosk  
• Bookmarks  
• Jobs not printed, which are called parked jobs  
Printing  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows  
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve  
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
1 With a document open, click File Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.  
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,  
also enter a four-digit PIN.  
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.  
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
7 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down  
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
9 Enter your PIN.  
10 Touch Done.  
11 Touch the job you want to print.  
12 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh  
computer  
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve  
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.  
3 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,  
also enter a four-digit PIN.  
4 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.  
5 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
6 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down  
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
7 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
8 Enter your PIN.  
Printing  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9 Touch the job you want to print.  
10 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Printing from a flash drive  
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file  
types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.  
The following flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer:  
• Lexar FireFly (512 MB or 1GB)  
• SanDisk Cruizer Micro (512 MB or 1 GB)  
• Sony (512 MB or 1GB)  
Notes:  
• Hi-Speed flash drives must support the USB 2.0 specification, specifically supporting the High Speed mode.  
• USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Flash drives formatted with NTFS (New  
Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.  
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control  
panel.  
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.  
• Some USB drives and USB hubs are not supported.  
To print from a flash drive:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.  
Printing  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes:  
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the  
printer ignores the flash drive.  
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busyappears. When the  
current job is completed, touch the USB icon to print documents from the flash drive.  
3 Touch the document you want to print.  
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for  
example, .jpg).  
4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies.  
5 Touch Print.  
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.  
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, but you still want to print files  
from the flash drive, then go to the home screen, touch the USB icon, and print the files.  
Printing information pages  
Printing a font sample list  
To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Reports.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Fontsappears.  
5 Touch Print Fonts.  
6 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.  
A font sample list prints.  
7 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Printing a directory list  
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Reports.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directoryappears.  
5 Touch Print Directory.  
Printing  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing the print quality test pages  
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
5 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
6 Touch Back.  
7 Touch Exit Config menu.  
Canceling a print job  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel  
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
on the keypad.  
Canceling a print job from the computer  
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:  
For Windows users  
In Windows Vista:  
1 Click  
.
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click Hardware and Sound.  
4 Click Printers.  
5 Double-click the printer icon.  
6 Select the job to cancel.  
7 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
In Windows XP:  
1 Click Start.  
2 From Printers and Faxes, double-click the printer icon.  
Printing  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Select the job to cancel.  
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
From the Windows taskbar:  
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.  
1 Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2 Select a job to cancel.  
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
For Macintosh users  
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.  
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.  
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
3 Double-click the printer icon.  
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.  
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.  
Printing  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Making copies  
Making a quick copy  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Copying using the ADF  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 Adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
4 Change the copy settings as needed.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Copying  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Copying using the scanner glass  
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
3 Change the copy settings as needed.  
4 Touch Copy It.  
5 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the  
Next Page.  
6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Copying photos  
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
3 Touch the Content arrows until Photograph appears.  
4 Touch Copy It.  
5 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.  
Copying on specialty media  
Making transparencies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place  
transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.  
6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.  
7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears.  
8 Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Copying  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Copying to letterhead  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up, top edge first in the multipurpose  
feeder.  
6 Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.  
7 Touch the arrows until Letterheadappears.  
8 Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Customizing copy settings  
Copying from one size to another  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.  
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size  
automatically.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray  
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
Copying  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray or feeder that contains the paper type you want.  
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.  
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.  
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.  
Note: The ADF automatically scans both sides of the page.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The  
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be  
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.  
To reduce or enlarge a copy:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.  
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Adjusting copy quality  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
Copying  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4 From the Content area, touch the arrows to best represent what you are copying:  
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print  
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser  
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Collating copies  
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the  
copies as groups of pages (not collated).  
Collated  
Not collated  
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.  
To turn collate off:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Placing separator sheets between copies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Separator Sheets.  
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator  
sheets are added to the end of the print job.  
Copying  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6 Select one of the following:  
• Between Copies  
• Between Jobs  
• Between Pages  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet  
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single  
sheet of paper.  
Notes:  
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.  
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Select a duplex setting.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Paper Saver.  
7 Select the desired output.  
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.  
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Copy It.  
Creating a custom job (job build)  
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each  
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the  
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with  
the same or different parameters.  
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:  
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.  
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.  
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.  
For example:  
Copying  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Custom Job.  
6 Touch On.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.  
9 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch  
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.  
Note: If required, change the job settings.  
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown  
on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise,  
touch Finish the job.  
Pausing the current print job to make copies  
When the “Allow priority copies” setting is On, the printer pauses the current print job when you start a copy job.  
Note: The “Allow priority copies” setting must be set to On in the Copy Settings menu so that you can pause the  
current print job and make copies.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Placing information on copies  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Copying  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Header/Footer.  
6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.  
7 Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.  
8 Touch Done.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Placing an overlay message on each page  
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To  
place a message on the copies:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Overlay.  
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Canceling a copy job  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF  
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel  
Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass  
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed  
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press  
on the keypad.  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.  
Copying  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The remainder of the copy job is canceled. The home screen appears.  
Understanding the copy screens and options  
Copy from  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy. Touch a paper size  
button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.  
Copy to  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.  
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting  
displayed.  
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting  
to accommodate the difference.  
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder,  
and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.  
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching  
paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.  
Scale  
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale  
can also be set for you automatically.  
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the  
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document  
information on your copy.  
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.  
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.  
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser  
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images  
Copying  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Sides (Duplex)  
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex)  
of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided  
copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.  
Collate  
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The  
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you  
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)  
(3,3,3).  
Options  
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Create Booklet, Advanced Imaging,  
Custom Job, Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Advanced Duplex, and Save as  
Shortcut settings.  
Paper Saver  
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also  
called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a  
single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds  
or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.  
Create Booklet  
This option creates a stack of collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page size of the original  
document and with all the pages in order.  
Note: To use Create Booklet, you must have a duplex unit attached to the printer.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Shadow  
Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, and sharpness before you copy the document.  
Custom Job  
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
Separator Sheets  
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn  
from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.  
Margin Shift  
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-  
punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin  
is too large, then the copy will be cropped.  
Copying  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edge Erase  
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an  
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the  
selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
Header/Footer  
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified  
header or footer location.  
Overlay  
This option creates a watermark(or message) that overlays the contentofyour copy.You can choosebetween Urgent,  
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick  
will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.  
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a  
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.  
Advanced Duplex  
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents  
have, and how your documents are bound.  
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.  
Save as Shortcut  
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.  
Improving copy quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a  
mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics such  
as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or  
newspaper  
When should I use Photograph mode?  
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality  
photograph or inkjet print.  
Copying  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E-mailing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Getting ready to e-mail  
Enabling the e-mail function  
The e-mail function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the e-mail function when setting up the printer for  
the first time, or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:  
Note: To complete this step, you must know your Primary SMTP (mail server) Gateway address. For more information,  
see your system support person.  
1 Touch Menus.  
2 Touch Settings.  
3 Touch General Settings.  
4 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setupto select Yes.  
5 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
6 Turn off the printer, wait ten seconds, and then turn the printer back on.  
7 From the printer control panel, select your language.  
8 Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.  
9 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.  
10 Touch E-mail, and then touch Continue.  
11 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.  
12 Touch Enter.  
13 Touch Continue.  
E-mailing  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
14 Type in the Primary SMTP Gateway address, and then touch Enter.  
15 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.  
When the home screen appears, the e-mail function is enabled.  
Setting up the e-mail function  
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.  
To set up the e-mail function:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Settings.  
5 Click Setup E-mail Server.  
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
7 Click Add.  
Configuring the e-mail settings  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Settings.  
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
6 Click Submit.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.  
4 Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.  
E-mailing  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.  
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).  
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.  
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.  
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.  
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.  
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
E-mailing a document  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.  
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
5 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
E-mailing  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
#
3 Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
4 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To box.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add; or search the address book.  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
Customizing e-mail settings  
Adding e-mail subject and message information  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Subject.  
7 Type the e-mail subject.  
8 Touch Done.  
9 Touch Message.  
10 Type an e-mail message.  
11 Touch Done.  
12 Touch E-mail It.  
E-mailing  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Changing the output file type  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free  
by Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the  
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent  
JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet  
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.  
Canceling an e-mail  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page/ Finish the Jobappears.  
Understanding e-mail options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed letter and legal  
paper sizes.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.  
E-mailing  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
E-mail Subject  
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.  
E-mail File Name  
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.  
E-mail Message  
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.  
Resolution  
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
E-mailing  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail  
address.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan  
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you copy the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out  
E-mailing  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Faxing  
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Getting the printer ready to fax  
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.  
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product  
ormakeanyelectricalor cablingconnections,such as thefax feature,power cord,ortelephone,duringalightning  
storm.  
Setting up the printer to fax  
When setting up the printer to fax, you must follow these steps:  
1 Choose a fax connection type, and then follow the steps for that method. For more information, see “Choosing  
a fax connection” on page 123.  
2 Follow the steps for enabling the fax function. For more information, see “Enabling the fax function” on  
page 133.  
Choosing a fax connection  
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To  
determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.  
Faxing  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Notes:  
• The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such  
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in  
the setup steps.  
• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required.  
Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that  
can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.  
• You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line  
to send and receive faxes.  
Equipment and service options  
Fax connection setup  
Connect directly to the telephone line  
See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on  
page 124  
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 125.  
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 125.  
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system  
Use a Distinctive Ring service  
See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 126.  
Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering  
machine  
See “Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering  
machine to the same telephone line” on page 126  
Connect through an adapter used in your area  
See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region”  
on page 128.  
Connect to a computer with a modem  
See “Connecting to a computer with a modem” on  
page 132.  
Connecting to an analog telephone line  
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the  
equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
Faxing  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to a DSL service  
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then  
follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.  
.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.  
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.  
1
3
2
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system  
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.  
Notes:  
• Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.  
• Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.  
• When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.  
• When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.  
• For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX  
system.  
Faxing  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting to a distinctive ring service  
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have  
multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern.  
This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, follow  
these steps to connect the equipment:  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer:  
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and  
triple ring patterns.  
a On the home screen, touch  
b Touch Settings.  
.
c Touch Fax Settings.  
d Touch Analog Fax Settings.  
e Touch until Distinctive Ringsappears  
Touch Distinctive Rings.  
f
g Touch the arrow for the pattern setting you want to change.  
h Touch Submit.  
Connecting the printer and a telephone or answering machine to  
the same telephone line  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack .  
Faxing  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Remove the plug from the printer EXT port  
.
4 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the printer EXT port  
.
Use one of the following methods:  
Answering machine  
Answering machine and telephone  
Faxing  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone or a telephone with an integrated answering  
machine  
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region  
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active  
telephone wall jack:  
Country/region  
• Austria  
• Cyprus  
• Denmark  
• Finland  
• France  
• Germany  
• Ireland  
• Italy  
• New Zealand  
• Netherlands  
• Norway  
• Portugal  
• Sweden  
• Switzerland  
• United Kingdom  
Countries or regions except Austria, Germany, and Switzerland  
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an  
answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary  
for the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.  
2 Connecttheotherendofthetelephonecableto theadapter,andthenconnecttheadapter to theactivetelephone  
wall jack.  
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.  
Faxing  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter.  
Use one of the following methods:  
Answering machine  
Telephone  
Faxing  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Austria, Germany, and Switzerland  
There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for the proper  
operation of the fax function and connected telephones.  
Connecting to a telephone wall jack in Germany  
Note: There is a special RJ-11 plug installed in the printer EXT port . Do not remove this plug. It is necessary for  
the proper operation of the fax function and connected telephones.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter.  
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.  
Faxing  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Connect the adapter into the N slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.  
4 Ifyouwouldliketousethesameline forbothfaxandtelephonecommunication,thenconnectasecondtelephone  
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.  
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second  
telephone cable (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog  
telephone wall jack.  
Faxing  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to a computer with a modem  
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port  
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.  
.
3 Remove the protective plug from the printer EXT port  
.
4 Connect your telephone to the computer telephone jack.  
Faxing  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Connect an additional telephone cord (not provided) from the computer modem to the printer EXT port  
.
Enabling the fax function  
The fax function must be enabled prior to use. If you disabled the fax function when setting up the printer for the  
first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, then follow these steps:  
Note: Before completing these instructions, make sure the fax cables are connected. For more information, see  
“Choosing a fax connection” on page 123.  
1 Touch Menus.  
2 Touch Settings.  
3 Touch General Settings.  
4 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setupto select Yes.  
5 Touch Submit.  
Submitting changesappears.  
6 Turn off the printer, connect the fax cables, and then turn the printer back on.  
7 From the printer control panel, select your language.  
8 Select your country or region, and then touch Continue.  
9 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.  
10 Touch Fax, and then touch Continue.  
11 Select any additional buttons you want to display on the home screen, and then touch Continue.  
12 Enter the Fax Station Name, and then touch Enter.  
13 Enter the Fax Station Number, and then touch Continue.  
14 Touch Enter.  
15 If prompted, set the date and time, and then touch Continue.  
When the home screen appears, the fax function is enabled.  
Faxing  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.  
7 Click Submit.  
Setting the date and time  
If the date or time that is printed on a fax job is incorrect, then you can reset the date and time. Then the correct date  
and time will be printed on every fax job. To set the date and time:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Security.  
4 Click Set Date and Time.  
5 In the Network Time Protocol section, select Enable NTP.  
Note: If you prefer to set the date and time manually, click inside the Manually Set Date & Time box, and then  
enter the current date and time.  
6 Verify that the time zone is correct.  
7 Click Submit.  
Turning daylight saving time on or off  
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time for certain time zones:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Security.  
4 Click Set Date and Time.  
5 Select Automatically Observe DST.  
6 Click Submit.  
Faxing  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax using the printer control panel  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.  
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or  
search the address book.  
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press  
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”  
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax using the computer  
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility  
of faxing documents directly from software programs.  
For Windows users  
1 With a file open, click File Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Click the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.  
4 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.  
5 Click OK, and then click OK again.  
6 Click Send.  
For Mac OS X version 10.5 or later users  
The steps for sending a fax from the computer vary depending on your operating system. For specific instructions  
using other Macintosh OS versions, see your Mac OS Help.  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
2 From the Printer pop-up menu, choose your printer.  
Note: In order to see the fax options on the Print dialog, you must use the fax driver for your printer. To install  
the fax driver, choose Add a printer, and then install the printer again with a different name, choosing the fax  
version of the driver.  
3 Enter the fax information (for example, the name and number of the fax recipient).  
4 Click Fax.  
Faxing  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Creating shortcuts  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web  
Server  
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to  
send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to  
a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.  
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.  
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.  
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).  
6 Assign a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number.  
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.  
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
6 Enter a name for the shortcut.  
7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect,  
then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
8 Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Faxing  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using shortcuts and the address book  
Using fax shortcuts  
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers  
when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the  
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can  
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can  
quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
#
3 Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.  
Using the address book  
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.  
(Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.)  
6 Touch Search.  
7 Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.  
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.  
9 Touch Fax It.  
Faxing  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing fax settings  
Changing the fax resolution  
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra  
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Making a fax lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Advanced Options.  
Faxing  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
7 Touch Delayed Send.  
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission  
are listed in the Fax Queue.  
8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.  
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is  
unavailable.  
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Fax it.  
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.  
Printing an incoming fax on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
In order to save paper, you can print all incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.  
1 On the home screen, touch Menus.  
2 Touch Settings, and then touch Fax Settings.  
3 Touch Analog Fax Setup.  
4 Touch Fax Receive Setting.  
5 Touch the arrows until Sides (Duplex) appears.  
6 Touch the arrows until Yesappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
Viewing a fax log  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Reports.  
4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.  
Blocking junk faxes  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
Faxing  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5 Click the Block No Name Fax option.  
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.  
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to  
block.  
Canceling an outgoing fax  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page/ Finish the Jobappears.  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to  
memory  
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.  
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.  
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.  
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the  
job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.  
Understanding fax options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be  
turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.  
Faxing  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.  
Resolution  
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a  
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the  
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.  
• Standard—Suitable for most documents  
• Fine—Recommended for documents with small print  
• Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail  
• Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,  
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.  
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter  
the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in  
sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times  
are cheaper.  
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the  
printer is turned on.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you fax the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning  
is paused, and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Advanced Duplex—Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has, and whether  
original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge  
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.  
Faxing  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Improving fax quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a  
mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,  
and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a  
magazine or newspaper.  
Holding and forwarding faxes  
Holding faxes  
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually  
or at a scheduled day or time.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click Holding Faxes.  
6 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.  
7 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:  
• Off  
• Always On  
• Manual  
• Scheduled  
8 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, go to step 9.  
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.  
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.  
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.  
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.  
9 Click Add.  
Faxing  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Forwarding a fax  
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:  
• Print  
• Print and Forward  
• Forward  
6 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:  
• Fax  
• E-mail  
• FTP  
• LDSS  
• eSF  
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.  
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward  
to” menu.  
8 Click Submit.  
Faxing  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning to an FTP address  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.  
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be  
sent to the server at a time.  
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes  
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be  
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending  
a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over  
your network instead of over the phone line.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Type the FTP address.  
5 Touch Send It.  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.  
4 Touch Send It.  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To field.  
7 Touch Send It.  
Creating shortcuts  
Instead of typing the entire FTP site address using the keypad each time you want to send a document to an FTP  
server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating  
shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.  
5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.  
6 Enter a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
2 Type the address of the FTP site.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Enter a name for the shortcut.  
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect,  
then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
6 Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Understanding FTP options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to scan.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG, or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.  
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site,  
computer, e-mail address, or the printer.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan  
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document  
– Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or  
decrease the white portion.  
– Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting  
a color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.  
– Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.  
– JPEG Quality—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression.  
– Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.  
– Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.  
– Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.  
– Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.  
– Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out  
Scanning to an FTP address  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Improving FTP quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is themain goalof sending a document  
to an FTP site, and preserving images copied from the original document is  
not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents  
that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains  
a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,  
and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos  
printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or  
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings).  
Scanning to a computer  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Scan Profile.  
Note: In order to use the Scan Profile function, you must have Java installed on your computer.  
3 Click Create Scan Profile.  
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.  
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.  
6 Enter a scan name.  
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.  
7 Click Submit.  
8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.  
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut numberwhen  
you are ready to scan your documents.  
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
#
c Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen,  
and then touch Profiles.  
d After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program  
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.  
9 Return to the computer to view the file.  
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.  
Understanding scan profile options  
Quick Setup  
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:  
Custom  
Photo - Color JPEG  
Photo - Color TIFF  
Text - BW PDF  
Text - BW TIFF  
Text/Photo - BW PDF  
Text/Photo - Color PDF  
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as  
needed.  
Format Type  
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Compression  
This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file.  
Default Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Default Content  
affects the quality and size of your scanned file.  
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes  
to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases  
the amount of information saved.  
Color  
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.  
Original Size  
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can  
scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Duplex  
This option informs the printer if your original document is printed on a single side or duplex (printed on both sides).  
This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.  
JPEG Quality  
This option adjusts the degree of compression for scanned JPEG documents in relation to the original document.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Color Dropout before you  
scan the document. It also lets you Scan edge to edge, as a Mirror Image, or as a Negative Image.  
• Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease  
the white portion.  
• Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.  
• Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.  
• Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.  
• Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a  
color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.  
• Color Dropout Threshold—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• Scan edge to edge—Select this check box to scan edge to edge.  
• Mirror Image—Select this check box to create a mirror image scan.  
• Negative Image—Select this check box to create a negative image scan.  
Scanning to a flash drive  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.  
The Held Jobs screen appears.  
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.  
5 Select the scan settings.  
6 Touch Scan It.  
Note: While the flash drive is attached to the printer, a USB icon appears on the home screen.  
Improving scan quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents  
that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a  
mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics,  
and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from  
a magazine or newspaper.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Understanding printer menus  
Menus list  
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus,  
touch  
on the home screen.  
Paper Menu  
Reports  
Network/Ports  
Default Source  
Paper Size/Type  
Configure MP  
Substitute Size  
Paper Texture  
Paper Weight  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Network Setup Page  
Network <x> Setup Page  
Wireless Setup Page1  
Shortcut List  
Active NIC  
Standard Network2  
SMTP Setup  
Standard USB  
Parallel <x>  
Serial <x>  
Paper Loading  
Custom Types  
Custom Names  
Custom Scan Sizes  
Universal Setup  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
Copy Shortcuts  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
NetWare Setup Page  
Print Fonts  
Print Directory  
Asset Report  
1 Only appears if a wireless card is installed.  
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.  
Security  
Settings  
Help  
Edit Security Setups  
Miscellaneous Security Settings  
Confidential Print  
General Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
Print all guides  
Copy guide  
E-mail guide  
Disc Wiping  
E-mail Settings  
FTP Settings  
Fax guide  
Security Audit Log  
Set Date and Time  
FTP guide  
Flash Drive Menu  
Print Settings  
Information guide  
Print Defects guide  
Supplies Guide  
Understanding printer menus  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper menu  
Default Source menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Default Source  
Tray <x>  
Notes:  
MP Feeder  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.  
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source  
setting for the duration of the print job.  
Envelope Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Env  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and  
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When  
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for  
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Paper Size/Type menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Tray <x> Size  
A4  
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
Legal  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the  
hardware appears.  
Letter  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and  
PaperTypesettings match, then thetraysareautomaticallylinked.When  
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Executive  
Oficio (México)  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray  
Tray <x> Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Notes:  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x> is  
the factory default setting for all other trays.  
• Ifavailable, a user-defined name willappearinstead ofCustomType<x>.  
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough Paper  
Recycled  
Custom Type <x>  
Multipurpose Tray Size  
A4  
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose tray  
Notes:  
A5  
A6  
• From the Paper menu, Configure Multipurpose Tray must be set to  
Cassette for Multipurpose Tray to appear as a menu setting.  
Executive  
Oficio (México)  
Folio  
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
default setting.  
JIS B5  
Legal  
Letter  
Statement  
Universal  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
Other Envelope  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray  
Multipurpose Tray Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Notes:  
• From the Paper menu, Configure Multipurpose Tray must be set to  
Cassette for Multipurpose Tray to appear as a menu setting.  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
• Plain paper is the factory default setting.  
Bond  
Envelope  
Rough Envelope  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough Paper  
Recycled  
Custom Type <x>  
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded  
Manual Paper Size  
A4  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
A5  
default setting.  
JIS B5  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded  
Manual Paper Type  
Paper  
Note: Plain paper is the factory default setting.  
Card Stock  
Transparencies  
Glossy paper  
Heavy Glossy  
Labels  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough Paper  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded  
Manual Envelope Size  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the  
international factory default setting.  
10 Envelope  
C5 Envelope  
B5 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Other Envelope  
Manual Envelope Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded  
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.  
Rough Envelope  
Custom Type <x>  
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.  
Configure MP menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Configure MP  
Cassette  
Manual  
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
• Cassette is the factory default setting.  
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic  
paper source.  
First  
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only for  
manual feed print jobs.  
• If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected, then  
paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first.  
Substitute Size menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Substitute Size  
Off  
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available  
Notes:  
Statement/A5  
Letter/A4  
All Listed  
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are  
allowed.  
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.  
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message  
appearing.  
Understanding printer menus  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Texture menu  
In the Paper Texture menu, the Select Type and Select Texture features work together to enable you to select the  
texture for a specific type of paper.  
Menu item  
Description  
Select Type  
Specifies the paper type  
Plain Texture  
Card Stock Texture  
Transparency Texture  
Recycled Texture  
Labels Texture  
Bond Texture  
Envelope Texture  
Rough Envelope Texture  
Letterhead Texture  
Preprinted Texture  
Colored Texture  
Light Texture  
Heavy Texture  
Rough/Cotton Texture  
Custom <x> Texture  
After you select a setting for Select Type, the Select Texture feature lets you  
set the texture for that type of media.  
Select Texture  
Smooth  
Normal  
Rough  
Notes:  
• Normal is the factory default setting for most items.  
• Rough is the factory default setting for Bond.  
• When Rough Texture is the setting selected for Select Type, Rough is the  
only Select Texture setting available.  
• Settings appear only if the paper is supported.  
Understanding printer menus  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Weight menu  
In the Paper Weight menu, the Select Type and Select Weight features work together to enable you to select the  
weight for a specific type of paper.  
Menu item  
Description  
Select Type  
Specifies the paper type  
Plain Weight  
Card Stock Weight  
Transparency Weight  
Recycled Weight  
Labels Weight  
Bond Weight  
Envelope Weight  
Rough Envelope Weight  
Letterhead Weight  
Preprinted Weight  
Colored Weight  
Light Weight  
Heavy Weight  
Rough/Cotton Weight  
Custom <x> Texture  
After you select a setting for Select Type, the Select Weight feature  
lets you set the weight for that type of media.  
Select Weight  
Light  
Normal  
Heavy  
Notes:  
• Normal is the factory default setting for most items.  
• When Light Weight is the setting selected for Select Type, Light  
is the only Select Weight setting available.  
• WhenHeavyWeightis thesettingselected forSelectType, Heavy  
is the only Select Weight setting available.  
• Settings appear only if the paper is supported.  
Paper Loading menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Card Stock as the paper type  
Card Stock Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.  
Understanding printer menus  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Recycled as the paper type  
Recycled Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Labels Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Labels as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Single-sided paper labels designed for laser printers are  
supported for occasional use: no more than 20 pages a month.  
Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual-web labels are not supported.  
Bond Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Bond as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Letterhead Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Letterhead as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Preprinted as the paper type  
Preprinted Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Colored Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Colored as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Light Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Light as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Heavy as the paper type  
Heavy Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Rough as the paper type  
Rough Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Custom <x> Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify  
Custom <x> as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is  
supported.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print  
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.  
Understanding printer menus  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Custom Types menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom  
Type <x>name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the  
Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional. This user-defined name  
displays instead of Custom Type <x>.  
Custom Type <x>  
Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Labels  
Notes:  
Envelope  
Rough/Cotton  
• Paper is the factory default setting for the Custom Type.  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder  
in order for you to print from that source.  
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus  
Recycled  
Paper  
Notes:  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Labels  
Envelope  
Cotton  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• The Recycled type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in  
order for you to print from that source.  
Custom Names menu  
Menu item  
Definition  
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom Type  
Custom Name <x>  
<x>name in the printer menus.  
<none>  
Custom Scan Sizes menu  
Menu item  
Description  
ID Card  
Specifies a non-standard scan size  
Width  
Notes:  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
• 4.65 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 118 millimeters is  
Height  
the international factory default setting for Width.  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
• 6.06 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 154 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Height.  
Orientation  
Landscape  
Portrait  
2 scans per side  
Off  
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
• On is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
On  
Understanding printer menus  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom  
Scan Size <x>name in the printer menus.  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Scan Size Name  
Width  
Notes:  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
Height  
1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)  
Orientation  
Landscape  
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Width.  
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is  
the international factory default setting for Height.  
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
Portrait  
2 scans per side  
Off  
On  
Universal Setup menu  
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal  
Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. Itis listedwith theother paper sizesettingsand includes similaroptions,  
such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.  
Menu item  
Description  
Identifies the units of measure  
Notes:  
Units of Measure  
Inches  
Millimeters  
• Inches is the US factory default setting.  
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.  
Portrait Width  
3–14 inches  
Sets the portrait width  
Notes:  
76–360 mm  
• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum  
width allowed.  
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased  
in 0.01-inch increments.  
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Portrait Height  
3–14 inches  
Sets the portrait height  
Notes:  
76–360 mm  
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum  
height allowed.  
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in  
0.01-inch increments.  
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can  
be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Understanding printer menus  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction  
Feed Direction  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
Long Edge  
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the  
maximum width supported in the tray.  
Reports menu  
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed  
memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the printer control panel  
language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network  
connection, and other information  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and  
details about printed pages  
Network Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such  
as the TCP/IP address information  
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
Network <x> Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such  
as the TCP/IP address information  
Notes:  
• This menu item is availablewhenmorethanonenetworkoptionisinstalled.  
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to  
print servers.  
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts  
Shortcut List  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes  
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,  
and blocked calls  
Copy Shortcuts  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts  
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network  
settings  
NetWare Setup Page  
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server  
installed.  
Understanding printer menus  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in  
the printer  
Print Fonts  
Printsa listofalltheresources storedonan optionalflashmemorycardorprinter  
hard disk  
Print Directory  
Notes:  
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.  
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly  
and working properly.  
Asset Report  
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number  
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be  
scanned into an asset database.  
Network/Ports menu  
Active NIC menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.  
Active NIC  
Auto  
<list of available network cards>  
Standard Network or Network <x> menus  
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Understanding printer menus  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires  
it, regardless of the default printer language  
PS SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When theOff setting is used, theprinteruses PCLemulationifPCLSmartSwitch  
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu  
if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Off  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Auto  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Network Buffer  
Auto  
Sets the size of the network input buffer  
Notes:  
3K to <maximum size allowed>  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The value can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or  
Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only  
appears if a formatted disk is installed.  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On value buffers jobs ontheprinterharddisk. This menuselection appears  
only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Mac Binary PS  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Understanding printer menus  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:  
• “Network Reports menu” on page 167  
• “Network Card menu” on page 167  
• “TCP/IP menu” on page 168  
• “IPv6 menu” on page 169  
• “Wireless menu” on page 169  
• “AppleTalk menu” on page 170  
• “NetWare menu” on page 170  
• “LexLink menu” on page 171  
Std Network Setup  
Reports or Network Reports  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
IPv6  
AppleTalk  
NetWare  
LexLink  
Net <x> Setup  
Reports or Network Reports  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless  
network.  
IPv6  
Wireless  
AppleTalk  
NetWare  
LexLink  
SMTP Setup menu  
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Primary SMTP Gateway Port  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
SMTP Timeout  
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying  
to send the e-mail  
5–30  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Specifies server information. This is a required item.  
Notes:  
Reply Address  
Use SSL  
Disabled  
Negotiate  
Required  
• The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.  
SMTP Server Authentication  
No authentication required  
Login / Plain  
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail  
privileges  
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.  
CRAM-MD5  
Digest-MD5  
NTLM  
Kerberos 5  
Understanding printer menus  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies server information  
Device-Initiated E-mail  
None  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
User-Initiated E-mail  
None  
Notes:  
• The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters.  
• None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail and  
User-Initiated E-mail.  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
Use Session User ID and Password  
Use Session E-mail address and Password  
Prompt User  
Device Userid  
Device password  
Kerberos 5 Realm  
NTLM Domain  
Network Reports menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Reports or  
Network Reports  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup  
Print Setup Page  
Print NetWare Setup Page  
Notes:  
• The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings, such as  
the TCP/IP address.  
• The NetWare Setup Pagemenu item appears onlyon models thatsupportNetWare  
and shows information about NetWare settings.  
Network Card menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Network Card  
Menu item  
Description  
View Card Status  
Connected  
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card  
Disconnected  
View Card Speed  
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card  
Lets you view the network addresses  
Network Address  
UAA  
LAA  
Understanding printer menus  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it  
is canceled  
Job Timeout  
0-225 seconds  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.  
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.  
Banner Page  
Allows the printer to print a banner page  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
TCP/IP menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup TCP/IP  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
On  
Activates TCP/IP  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
View Hostname  
IP Address  
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address  
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP  
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that  
support BOOTP and RARP.  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway  
Netmask  
Gateway  
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting  
Enable DHCP  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable RARP  
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable BOOTP  
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting  
AutoIP  
Yes  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
No  
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using the  
File Transfer Protocol.  
Enable FTP/TFTP  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable HTTP Server  
Enables the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When this is enabled, the  
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address  
WINS Server Address  
Enable DDNS  
Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting  
Enable mDNS  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address  
DNS Server Address  
IPv6 menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup IPv6  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables IPv6 in the printer  
Enable IPv6  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6  
address configuration entries provided by a router  
Auto Configuration  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Lets you view the current setting  
View Hostname  
View Address  
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web  
Server.  
View Router Address  
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer  
Enable DHCPv6  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Wireless menu  
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.  
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.  
Understanding printer menus  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Network <x> Net <x> Setup Wireless  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the network mode  
Notes:  
Network Mode  
Infrastructure  
Ad hoc  
• Infrastructuremodeletstheprinteraccessanetworkusinganaccess  
point.  
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures the  
printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer.  
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network  
Compatibility  
802.11n  
802.11b/g  
802.11b/g/n  
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use  
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection  
Choose Network  
<list of available networks>  
View Signal Quality  
View Security Mode  
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.  
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.  
AppleTalk menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
Yes  
Activates or deactivates AppleTalk support  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
No  
View Name  
View Address  
Set Zone  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address  
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network  
<list of zones available on the  
network>  
Note:The factory defaultsettingis the defaultzone forthe network. If nodefault  
zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the factory default setting.  
NetWare menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup NetWare  
Menu item  
Description  
Activates NetWare support  
Activate  
Yes  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
No  
Understanding printer menus  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name  
View Login Name  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode  
Print Mode  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Network Number  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting  
Select IPX Frame Types  
Ethernet 802.2  
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.  
Ethernet 802.3  
Ethernet Type II  
Ethernet SNAP  
Packet Burst  
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of  
multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting  
NSQ/GSQ Mode  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
LexLink menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Standard Network or Network <x> Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup LexLink menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Activates LexLink support  
Activate  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname  
View Nickname  
Note: The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web  
Server.  
Understanding printer menus  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Standard USB menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PCL SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS  
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL  
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
NPA Mode  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting fromtheprintercontrolpanel andthen exiting themenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the size of the USB input buffer  
Notes:  
USB Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
3K to <maximum size allowed>  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the  
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save setting is On  
or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the  
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting fromtheprintercontrolpanel andthen exiting themenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Job Buffering  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Auto  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changing this setting fromtheprintercontrolpanel andthen exiting themenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Mac Binary PS  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print  
server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.  
USB With ENA  
ENA Address  
ENA Netmask  
ENA Gateway  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through the USB port.  
Parallel <x> menu  
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PCL SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PS SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch  
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if  
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Understanding printer menus  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
NPA Mode  
On  
Off  
Auto  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Parallel Buffer  
Disabled  
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the  
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
3K to <max size allowed>  
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Job Buffering  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port  
Advanced Status  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.  
Specifies the parallel port protocol  
Protocol  
Standard  
Fastbytes  
Notes:  
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most  
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.  
• The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.  
Understanding printer menus  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization  
requests from the computer  
Honor Init  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the  
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the  
computer is turned on.  
Determines whetherthe parallel portdata is sampledon theleading ortrailingedge  
of strobe  
Parallel Mode 2  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Parallel With ENA  
ENA Address  
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print  
server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.  
ENA Netmask  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print  
server through a parallel port.  
ENA Gateway  
Serial <x> menu  
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PCL SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the  
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Understanding printer menus  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received  
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PS SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch  
is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if  
PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
On  
Off  
Auto  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data  
is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.  
• When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the  
format, and then processes it appropriately.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Sets the size of the serial input buffer  
Notes:  
Serial Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
3K to <maximum size allowed>  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the  
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,  
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the  
size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changingthis settingfromtheprintercontrolpaneland thenexitingthemenus  
causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port  
Serial Protocol  
DTR  
Notes:  
DTR/DSR  
XON/XOFF  
XON/XOFF/DTR  
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR  
• DTR is the factory default setting.  
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.  
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.  
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and  
software handshaking settings.  
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer  
Robust XON  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to  
XON/XOFF.  
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port  
Baud  
1200  
Notes:  
2400  
4800  
• 9600 is the factory default setting.  
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the  
Standard Serialmenu. Thesesettings do notappear intheSerialOptionor Serial  
Option 2 menus.  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
138200  
172800  
230400  
345600  
Data Bits  
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame  
7
8
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.  
Parity  
Even  
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Odd  
None  
Ignore  
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking signal  
used by most serial cables.  
Honor DSR  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data  
createdbyelectricalnoisein the serial cable. Theelectricalnoisecan causestray  
characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from printing.  
• This menu item appears only if Serial RS-232/RS-422 is set to RS 232.  
Understanding printer menus  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security menu  
Miscellaneous menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control  
panel before all users are locked out  
Panel Logins  
Login failures  
Failure time frame  
Lockout time  
Login timeout  
Notes:  
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are  
locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.  
• “Failuretimeframe”specifiesthetimeframe during whichfailed login attempts  
can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5  
minutes is the factory default setting.  
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the  
login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory  
default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.  
• “Logintimeout”specifieshowlong theprinterremainsidleon theHomescreen  
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds.  
300 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Remote Logins  
Login failures  
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer before  
all remote users are locked out  
Failure time frame  
Lockout time  
Login timeout  
Notes:  
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are  
locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.  
• “Failuretimeframe”specifiesthetimeframe during whichfailed login attempts  
can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5  
minutes is the factory default setting.  
• “Lockout time” specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the login  
failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factorydefault  
setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.  
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before  
automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds. 300  
seconds is the factory default setting.  
Confidential Print menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered  
Max Invalid PIN  
Off  
2–10  
Notes:  
• Off is the default setting.  
• This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.  
• Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.  
Understanding printer menus  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Menu item  
Description  
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted  
Job Expiration  
Off  
Notes:  
1 hour  
4 hours  
• Off is the default setting.  
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the  
printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs does  
not change to the new default value.  
24 hours  
1 week  
• If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.  
Disk Wiping menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Automatic Wiping  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system  
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,  
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Off  
On  
Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not permit  
the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized.  
OnlyAutomatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping withouthaving to take  
the printer offline for an extended amount of time.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
• Off is the default setting.  
• Duetothe largeamountof resources requiredforAutomaticWiping, activating  
this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the printer requires  
hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service.  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system  
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,  
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Manual Wiping  
Start now  
Do not start now  
Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a  
print job that has been processed (i.e. printed). This type of wipe does not erase any  
information related to an unprocessed print job.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
• "Do not start now" is the default setting.  
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully  
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk  
wipe.  
Understanding printer menus  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system  
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,  
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Automatic Method  
Single pass  
Multiple pass  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass  
method only.  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system  
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,  
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Manual Method  
Single pass  
Multiple pass  
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the filesystem to reuse marked disk space  
without first having to wipe it.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass  
method only.  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system  
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,  
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Scheduled Method  
Single pass  
Multiple pass  
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the filesystem to reuse marked disk space  
without first having to wipe it.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is  
installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass  
method only.  
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or  
confirmation message.  
Security Audit Log menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables an authorized user to export the security log  
Export Log  
Notes:  
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached  
to the printer.  
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.  
Understanding printer menus  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted  
Delete Log  
Delete now  
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.  
Do not delete  
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created  
Configure Log  
Enable Audit  
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.  
Enable Remote Syslog  
Remote Syslog Facility  
Severity of events to log  
Set Date/Time menu  
Menu item  
Description  
View Date/Time  
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer  
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.  
Set Date/Time  
<input date/time>  
Time Zone  
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.  
<list of time zones>  
Observe DST  
Note:On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time  
associated with the Time Zone setting.  
On  
Off  
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a  
network  
Enable NTP  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Settings menu  
General Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display  
Display Language  
English  
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.  
Francais  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Portuguese  
Suomi  
Russian  
Polski  
Turkce  
Korean  
Eco-Mode  
Off  
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media  
Notes:  
Energy  
Energy/Paper  
Paper  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its  
factory default settings.  
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.  
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.  
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media  
needed for a print job by duplexing each page. Performance  
may be affected, but print quality is not.  
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and  
specialty media.  
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded  
ADF Loaded Beep  
Enabled  
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.  
Disabled  
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer  
Quiet Mode  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Onconfigures theprintertoproduceas littlenoiseas possible.  
Understanding printer menus  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard  
Notes:  
Run Initial setup  
Yes  
No  
• Yes is the factory default setting.  
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the  
Country select screen, the default becomes No.  
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer  
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to  
accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel  
keyboard.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard Type  
English  
Francais  
Francais Canadien  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Suomi  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Polski  
Swiss German  
Swiss French  
Korean  
Turkce  
Custom Key <x>  
Accents/Symbols Tab  
On  
Off  
Russian/Polish Tab  
On  
Off  
Korean Tab  
On  
Off  
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default is  
determined by the country/region selection in the initial setup  
wizard.  
Paper Sizes  
U.S.  
Metric  
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port-blocking  
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers  
separated by a semicolon.  
Scan to PC Port Range  
<port range>  
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of  
the home screen  
Displayed Information  
Left side  
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following  
options:  
Right side  
Custom Text <x>  
<text entry>  
Cartridge levels on status screen  
On  
Model Name  
None  
IP Address  
Hostname  
Off  
Contact Name  
Location  
Date/Time  
Black Toner  
When to Display  
Display  
mDNS/DDNS Service Name  
Zero Configuration Name  
Custom Text <x>  
Do not display  
Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Notes:  
Default Message  
<text entry>  
Alternate Message  
<text entry>  
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.  
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.  
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to  
Display.  
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.  
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service  
Errors can be customized with the following options:  
Displayed Information (continued)  
Paper Jam  
Activate  
Load Paper  
Service Errors  
Yes  
No  
Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Default Message  
<text entry>  
Alternate Message  
<text entry>  
Notes:  
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.  
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to  
Display.  
Understanding printer menus  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and default  
buttons can be removed.  
Home screen customization  
Change Language  
Copy  
Available selections for each button are:  
Display  
Do Not Display  
Copy Shortcuts  
Fax  
Fax Shortcuts  
E-mail  
E-mail Shortcuts  
FTP  
FTP Shortcuts  
Search Held Jobs  
Held Jobs  
USB Drive  
Profiles  
Bookmarks  
Jobs by user  
Date Format  
MM-DD-YYYY  
DD-MM-YYYY  
YYYY-MM-DD  
Formats the printer date  
Formats the printer time  
Time Format  
12 hour A.M./P.M.  
24 hour clock  
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen  
Screen Brightness  
20–100  
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time  
One Page Copy  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional  
output bin  
Output Lighting  
Standard Bin LED  
Normal/Standby Mode  
Notes:  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.  
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.  
Power Saver  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
Show Bookmarks  
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs  
area  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When On is selected,  
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.  
Understanding printer menus  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during  
copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB  
Allow Background Removal  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the  
image will be removed.  
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file  
Allow Custom Job Scans  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and  
operating properly for this menu item to be available.  
• On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow  
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.  
Scanner Jam Recovery  
Job level  
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam  
occurs in the ADF  
Page level  
Notes:  
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if any  
pages jam.  
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page  
forward.  
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server  
refreshes  
Web Page Refresh Rate  
30–300  
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Specifies a contact name for the printer  
Contact Name  
Location  
Specifies the location of the printer  
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.  
Alarms  
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator  
intervention  
Alarm Control  
Cartridge Alarm  
Available selections for each alarm type are:  
Off  
Single  
Notes:  
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single  
sounds three quick beeps.  
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm. Off means  
no alarm will sound.  
Timeouts  
Standby Mode  
Disabled  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system  
enters a lower power state  
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.  
2–240  
Understanding printer menus  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivitybefore some systems  
begin entering a minimum power state.  
Timeouts  
Power Saver Mode  
Disabled  
2–240  
Notes:  
• 30 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before  
returning the printer display to a Readystate  
Screen Timeout  
15–300  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an  
Timeouts  
end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print  
job  
Print Timeout  
Disabled  
1–255  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the  
printeris printed, and then the printer checks to seeif anynew  
print jobs are waiting.  
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS  
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation  
print jobs.  
Timeouts  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional  
data before canceling a print job  
Wait Timeout  
Disabled  
Notes:  
15–65535  
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using  
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or  
PPDS emulation print jobs.  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention  
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and  
continues to print other jobs in the print queue  
Timeouts  
Job Hold Timeout  
Disabled  
5–255  
Notes:  
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is  
installed.  
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain  
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time  
period  
Print Recovery  
Auto Continue  
Disabled  
5–255  
Notes:  
• Disabled is the factory default setting.  
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.  
Understanding printer menus  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages  
Print Recovery  
Jam Recovery  
Notes:  
On  
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints  
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages  
is needed for other printer tasks.  
Off  
Auto  
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.  
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.  
Print Recovery  
Lets the printersuccessfullyprintapagethatmaynothaveprinted  
otherwise  
Page Protect  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is thefactory defaultsetting. Off prints a partialpagewhen  
there is not enough memory to print the whole page.  
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the  
entire page prints.  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore  
keeps the user-defined settings.  
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default  
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads  
stored in RAM aredeleted. Downloads stored in flash memory  
or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
Copy Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Printed Image  
Text  
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original  
documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.  
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.  
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction  
of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the  
amount of information saved.  
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed  
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or color  
image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited  
number of colors.  
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white  
background.  
Understanding printer menus  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-  
sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex  
Sides (Duplex)  
1 sided to 1 sided  
1 sided to 2 sided  
2 sided to 1 sided  
2 sided to 2 sided  
Notes:  
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on one side.  
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets,  
the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.  
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied  
page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is  
three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy  
is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.  
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy  
mimics the original exactly.  
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
2 on 1 Portrait  
2 on 1 Landscape  
4 on 1 Portrait  
4 on 1 Landscape  
Print Page Borders  
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
On  
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies  
of the job  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Original Size  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
3 x 5 in.  
4 x 6 in.  
Understanding printer menus  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs  
Copy To Source  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Auto Size Match  
Transparency Separators  
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Specifies a paper source  
Separator Sheet Source  
Tray <x>  
Manual Feeder  
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job  
Darkness  
1–9  
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job  
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page  
Notes:  
Number of Copies  
Header/Footer  
Top left  
Top left  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top left.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Understanding printer menus  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page  
Header/Footer  
Top middle  
Top middle  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page  
Header/Footer  
Top right  
Top right  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top right.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Header/Footer  
Bottom left  
Bottom left  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Understanding printer menus  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page  
Header/Footer  
Bottom middle  
Bottom middle  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page  
Header/Footer  
Bottom right  
Bottom right  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Overlay  
Off  
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Confidential  
Copy  
Draft  
Urgent  
Custom  
Custom Overlay  
Specifies custom overlay text  
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document  
Allow priority copies  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Custom Job scanning  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed.  
Understanding printer menus  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page  
Auto Center  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease  
the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the sharpness of a copy  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Creates a sample copy of the original document  
Notes:  
Sample Copy  
On  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• This menu item appears only for collated copy sets.  
Fax Settings menu  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu  
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.  
General Fax Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer  
Specifies a number associated with the fax  
Specifies how the fax is identified to recipients in the fax header  
Station Name  
Station Number  
Station ID  
Station Name  
Station Number  
Enable Manual Fax  
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone  
hand set  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.  
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.  
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax  
jobs  
Memory Use  
All receive  
Mostly receive  
Equal  
Notes:  
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
Mostly sent  
All send  
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and  
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.  
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
Specifies whether the user may cancel fax jobs  
Cancel Faxes  
Allow  
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it does not appear as an option.  
Don't Allow  
Understanding printer menus  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of caller ID being used  
Notes:  
Caller ID  
FSK  
DTMF  
• FSK is the factory default setting.  
• This option appears only when the selected country/region supports multiple  
caller ID patterns.  
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number  
Fax number masking  
Off  
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”  
From left  
From right  
setting.  
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number  
Digits to mask  
0–58  
Fax Cover Page  
Menu item  
Description  
Fax Cover Page  
Off by default  
On by default  
Never Use  
Always Use  
Include To field  
On  
Configures the fax cover page  
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.  
Off  
Include From field  
On  
Off  
From  
Include Message field  
On  
Off  
Message  
Include Logo  
On  
Off  
Include Footer <x>  
Footer <x>  
Understanding printer menus  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Send Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifiesqualityindots perinch (dpi). Ahigherresolutiongivesgreaterprintquality,  
but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.  
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
Mixed Sizes  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Duplex  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Content  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers  
Dial Prefix  
Understanding printer menus  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Establishes a dialing prefix rule  
Dialing Prefix Rules  
Prefix Rule <x>  
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number  
Automatic Redial  
0–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Redial Frequency  
Specifies the number of minutes between redials  
1–200  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone  
Behind a PABX  
Yes  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Enable ECM  
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable Fax Scans  
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Driver to fax  
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Dial Mode  
Tone  
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.  
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.  
Pulse  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent  
Max Speed  
2400  
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• On is the factory default setting.  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease  
the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Shadow Detail  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing  
Scan edge to edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the sharpness of a fax  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Enables color faxing  
Enable Color Fax Scans  
On by default  
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.  
Never use  
Always use  
Off by default  
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white  
Mono Faxes  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Understanding printer menus  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Receive Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer  
Enable Fax Receive  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Allows a fax to be held until toner or supplies are replaced  
Fax Job Waiting  
None  
Notes:  
Toner  
Toner and Supplies  
• This menu item appears only if a hard disk is supported and installed.  
• None is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job  
Rings to Answer  
1–25  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Reduction  
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated  
fax source  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an  
incoming fax  
Paper Source  
Auto  
Tray <x>  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.  
Multi-Purpose Feeder  
Places a sheet of paper before or after a received fax.  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
After job  
Before job  
Separator Sheet Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source.  
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.  
Manual feeder  
Sides (Duplex)  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax  
Fax Footer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received  
Max Speed  
2400  
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Fax Forwarding  
Forward  
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient  
Print  
Print and Forward  
Understanding printer menus  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded  
Forward to  
Fax  
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.  
E-mail  
FTP  
LDSS  
eSF  
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,  
FPT, LDSS, or eSF)  
Forward to Shortcut  
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified  
Block No Name Fax  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer  
Banned Fax List  
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule  
Holding Faxes  
Held Fax Mode  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Always On  
Manual  
Scheduled  
Fax Holding Schedule  
Lets you receive a color fax  
Enable Color Fax Receive  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Fax Log Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job  
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Receive Error Log  
Print Never  
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error  
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.  
Print on Error  
Auto Print Logs  
Enables automatic printing of fax logs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Logs print after every 200 jobs.  
• On is the factory default setting.  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs  
Note: Tray <x> is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Understanding printer menus  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name  
returned  
Logs Display  
Remote Station Name  
Dialed Number  
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.  
Enable Job Log  
Enables access to the Fax Job log  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Enable Call Log  
Enables access to the Fax Call log  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Speaker Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Speaker Mode  
Always Off  
Notes:  
• Always Off turns the speaker off.  
On until Connected  
Always On  
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues  
a noise until the fax connection is made.  
• Always On turns the speaker on.  
Controls the volume setting  
Speaker Volume  
High  
Low  
Note: High is the factory default setting.  
Ringer Volume  
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Distinctive Rings  
Menu item  
Description  
Single Ring  
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern  
Double Ring  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern  
Triple Ring  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu  
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.  
Understanding printer menus  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax Server Setup  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets youentertheinformationusingthevirtualkeyboardontheprintertouchscreen  
To Format  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Message  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Specifies the image type for scan to fax  
Image Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
XPS (.xps)  
TIFF (.tif)  
Content  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Fine  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
1–9  
Note: 5 factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Understanding printer menus  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
Mixed Sizes  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a  
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,  
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Enables analog fax receive  
Enable Analog Receive  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
E-mail Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies e-mail server information  
E-mail Server Setup  
Subject  
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
Message  
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail  
E-mail Server Setup  
Send me a copy  
Never appears  
On by default  
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.  
Off by default  
Always On  
Understanding printer menus  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes  
E-mail Server Setup  
Max e-mail size  
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.  
0–65535 KB  
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit  
E-mail Server Setup  
Size Error Message  
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a  
company domain name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Limit destinations  
Note: E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.  
E-mail Server Setup  
Web Link Setup  
Server  
Defines the e-mail server path name; for example: /directory/path  
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ? <  
> |.  
Login  
Password  
Path  
Base file name  
Web Link  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the format of the file  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Color  
Gray  
Note: Color is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Resolution  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Understanding printer menus  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
Mixed Sizes  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
3 x 5 in.  
4 x 6 in.  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Text Default  
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
Text/Photo Default  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies how the images will be sent  
E-mail images sent as  
Attachment  
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.  
Web Link  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For  
a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the  
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Env  
MP Feeder  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when  
Color is set to Off.  
E-mail Bit Depth  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Scan Preview  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts  
Notes:  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail  
Destination screen.  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Use cc:/bcc:  
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FTP Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the format of the FTP file  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Color  
Gray  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Resolution  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Understanding printer menus  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
Mixed Sizes  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
3 x 5 in.  
4 x 6 in.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
Text Default  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
Photo Default  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For  
a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the  
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Env  
MP Feeder  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
FTP bit Depth  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Base File Name  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Notes:  
Custom Job Scanning  
On  
Off  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Red  
Notes:  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Green  
Blue  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Flash Drive menu  
Scan Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the format of the file  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Color  
Gray  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Resolution  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default  
Legal  
setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Oficio (Mexico)  
Universal  
Mixed Sizes  
A4  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
ID Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Book Original  
Business Card  
3 x 5 in.  
4 x 6 in.  
Understanding printer menus  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for  
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the  
quality of the image.  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.  
Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
Text Default  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Text/Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the  
image  
5–90  
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.  
Photo Default  
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image  
5–90  
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For  
a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the  
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Scan bit Depth  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when  
Color is set to Off  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Base File Name  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Notes:  
Off  
On  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Scan Preview  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned image  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Print Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of copies to print  
Copies  
Understanding printer menus  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the  
flash drive  
Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Envelope  
Collate  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
Sides (Duplex)  
1 sided  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)  
2 sided  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of  
the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages  
and the top edge of landscape pages.  
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages  
and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Specifies the orientation of the print job  
Orientation  
Auto  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
N-up (pages/side)  
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.  
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.  
Off  
2 Up  
3 Up  
4 Up  
6 Up  
9 Up  
12 Up  
16 Up  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up  
N-up Border  
None  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Solid  
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up  
Notes:  
N-up Ordering  
Horizontal  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in  
portrait or landscape orientation.  
Understanding printer menus  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Separator Sheet Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source  
Manual Feeder  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Print Settings  
Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the default printer language  
Notes:  
Printer Language  
PCL Emulation  
PS Emulation  
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print  
jobs.PostScriptemulationusesaPSinterpreterforprocessing  
print jobs.  
• PCL is the factory default printer language.  
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a  
software program from sending print jobs that use another  
printer language.  
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they  
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are  
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally.  
When the missing information and/or options are obtained, the  
stored jobs print.  
Job Waiting  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only if a non-Read Only printer hard disk  
is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not  
deleted if the printer loses power.  
Understanding printer menus  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the logical and physical printable area  
Print Area  
Normal  
Whole Page  
Notes:  
• This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the  
printer Setup menu.  
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to  
print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal  
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.  
• The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into  
the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the  
printer will clip the image at the Normal setting boundary.  
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a  
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed  
using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.  
Sets the storage location for downloads  
Notes:  
Download Target  
RAM  
Flash  
Disk  
• RAM is the factory default setting.  
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk  
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in  
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the  
printer is turned off.  
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.  
• This menu appears only if a flash and/or disk option is  
installed.  
Job Accounting  
Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about  
the most recent print jobs on the hard disk  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off means the printer does  
not store job statistics.  
• The statistics include a record of print errors, the print time,  
the job size in bytes, the requested paper size and type, the  
totalnumberofprintedpages,andthetotalnumberofcopies  
requested.  
• Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is  
installed and working properly. It should not be Read/Write  
or Write protected. Job Buffer Size should not be set to 100%.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then  
exiting the menus causes the printer to reset. The menu  
selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as  
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job  
that requires more memory than is available  
Resource Save  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain  
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are  
deleted in order to process print jobs.  
• The On setting retains the downloads during language  
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory,  
38 Memory Fullappears, and downloads arenot deleted.  
Print All Order  
Alphabetically  
Newest First  
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed  
when Print All is selected  
Notes:  
Oldest First  
• Alphabetically is the factory default setting.  
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer  
control panel.  
Finishing menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs  
Sides (Duplex)  
2 sided  
Notes:  
1 sided  
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.  
• To set 2-sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click  
File Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup; for  
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the  
Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of  
the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages  
and the top edge of landscape pages.  
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages  
and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
Copies  
1–999  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Collate  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies  
menu setting.  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
• None is the factory default setting.  
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if  
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between  
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.  
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This  
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a  
document for notes.  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Notes:  
Multi-Purpose Feeder  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for  
Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper  
N-up (pages-side)  
Off  
Notes:  
2-Up  
3-Up  
4-Up  
6-Up  
9-Up  
12-Up  
16-Up  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
N-up Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up (pages-sides)  
Notes:  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in  
portrait or landscape orientation.  
Orientation  
Auto  
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and  
Landscape  
Portrait  
landscape.  
Understanding printer menus  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up (pages-sides)  
N-up Border  
None  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Solid  
Quality menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Resolution  
300 dpi  
Specifies the printed output resolution  
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.  
600 dpi  
1200 dpi  
1200 Image Q  
2400 Image Q  
Pixel Boost  
Off  
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics  
Notes:  
Fonts  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Fonts applies this setting only to text.  
• Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.  
• Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.  
• Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.  
Horizontally  
Vertically  
Both Directions  
Toner Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the printed output  
1–10  
Notes:  
• 8 is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.  
Enhance Fine Lines  
Enables aprintmodepreferablefor filessuchas architecturaldrawings,maps,electrical  
circuit diagrams, and flow charts  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network  
printer IP address in a browser window.  
Adjusts the gray value of printed output  
Gray Correction  
Auto  
Off  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner  
Notes:  
Brightness  
-6 to +6  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will  
lighten them and conserve toner.  
Understanding printer menus  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output  
Contrast  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.  
Utilities menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk  
Remove Held Jobs  
Confidential  
Held  
Notes:  
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.  
Bookmarks, jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.  
Not Restored  
All  
• Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored  
from the disk.  
Format Flash  
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing  
a flash memory option card in the printer.  
Yes  
No  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory  
is formatting.  
Notes:  
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating  
properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card must  
not be Read/Write or Write protected.  
• Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.  
• No cancels the format request.  
Delete Downloads on Disk  
Delete Now  
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held Jobs, buffered  
jobs, and parked jobs. Job accounting information is not affected.  
Do Not Delete  
Note: Delete Now is the default setting.  
Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer  
hard disk  
Job Acct Stat  
Print  
Clear  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for  
this menu item to be available.  
• Selecting Print prints a list of statistics.  
• Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk.  
• TheClearselection willnotappear ifJobAccounting is setto MarkTrackTM using  
NPA.  
Hex Trace  
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem  
Activate  
Notes:  
• When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal  
and character representation and control codes are not executed.  
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.  
Understanding printer menus  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The estimate  
is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.  
Coverage Estimator  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
PDF menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Scale to Fit  
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size  
Yes  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Prints annotations in a PDF  
Annotations  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
PostScript menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a page containing the PostScript error  
Print PS Error  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Establishes the font search order  
Notes:  
Font Priority  
Resident  
Flash/Disk  
• Resident is the factory default setting.  
• A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be  
installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be  
available.  
• The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read/Write, Write,  
or password protected.  
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.  
Understanding printer menus  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PCL Emul menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item  
Font Source  
Resident  
Disk  
Notes:  
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of  
Download  
Flash  
All  
fonts downloaded into printer RAM.  
• FlashandDisk settingsappear only ifapplicableandshow allfontsresident  
in that option.  
• Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be  
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.  
• Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts downloaded  
into printer RAM.  
• All shows all fonts available to any option.  
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored  
Notes:  
Font Name  
<list of available fonts>  
• Courier 10 is the factory default setting.  
• The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and  
D for download.  
Specifies the symbol set for each font name  
Symbol Set  
10U PC-8  
Notes:  
12U PC-850  
• 10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting.  
• 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.  
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,  
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or  
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the  
supported symbol sets are shown.  
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Pitch  
Notes:  
0.08–100  
• 10 is the factory default setting.  
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).  
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.  
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but  
cannot be changed.  
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Orientation  
Notes:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
• Portrait is the factory default setting.  
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.  
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.  
Understanding printer menus  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Lines per Page  
1–255  
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.  
• The printersets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines  
per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper  
Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
A4 Width  
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper  
Notes:  
198 mm  
203 mm  
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.  
• The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of  
eighty 10-pitch characters.  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return after a  
line feed control command  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Auto CR after LF  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether theprinterautomatically performs a line feed aftera carriage  
return control command  
Auto LF after CR  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use  
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders  
Tray Renumber  
Assign MP Feeder  
Off  
Notes:  
None  
0–199  
Assign Tray <x>  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• None is not an available selection. It appears only when it is selected by  
the PCL 5 interpreter.  
Off  
None  
0–199  
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.  
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.  
Assign Manual Paper  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Assign Man Env  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Understanding printer menus  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or  
feeder, even if it has not been installed  
Tray Renumber  
View Factory Def  
MPF Default = 8  
T1 Default = 1  
T2 Default = 4  
T3 Default = 5  
T4 Default = 20  
T5 Default = 21  
Env Default = 6  
MPaper Default = 2  
MEnv Default = 3  
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings  
Tray Renumber  
Restore Defaults  
Yes  
No  
HTML menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Intl CG Times  
Sets the default font for HTML documents  
Font Name  
Albertus MT  
Antique Olive  
Apple Chancery  
Arial MT  
Intl Courier  
Intl Univers  
Joanna MT  
Letter Gothic  
Lubalin Gothic  
Marigold  
Notes:  
• The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a  
font.  
• The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is  
installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and MingMT-  
Light.  
Avant Garde  
Bodoni  
Bookman  
Chicago  
MonaLisa Recut  
Monaco  
Clarendon  
Cooper Black  
Copperplate  
Coronet  
New CenturySbk  
New York  
Optima  
Oxford  
Courier  
Palatino  
Eurostile  
Garamond  
Geneva  
StempelGaramond  
Taffy  
Times  
Gill Sans  
Goudy  
TimesNewRoman  
Univers  
Helvetica  
Zapf Chancery  
Hoefler Text  
Understanding printer menus  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the default font size for HTML documents  
Font Size  
1–255 pt  
Notes:  
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.  
• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
Scales the default font for HTML documents  
Scale  
1–400%  
Notes:  
• 100% is the factory default setting.  
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Margin Size  
Sets the page margin for HTML documents  
8–255 mm  
Notes:  
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.  
• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Backgrounds  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents  
Note: Print is the factory default setting.  
Image menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Auto Fit  
On  
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation  
Notes:  
Off  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.  
Invert  
On  
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.  
Scaling  
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size  
Anchor Top Left  
Best Fit  
Anchor Center  
Fit Height/Width  
Fit Height  
Notes:  
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.  
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.  
Fit Width  
Understanding printer menus  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the image orientation  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Rev Portrait  
Rev Landscape  
XPS menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors  
Print Error Pages  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Help menu  
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information  
about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all  
guidesto print all of them at one time.  
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the  
Software and Documentation CD.  
Menu item  
Print all guides  
Copy guide  
E-mail guide  
Description  
Prints all the guides  
Provides information about making copies and changing settings  
Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers,  
or the address book, and changing settings  
Fax guide  
FTP guide  
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,  
or the address book, and changing settings  
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using  
an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing settings  
Information guide  
Print defects guide  
Supplies guide  
Provides help in locating additional information  
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints  
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies  
Understanding printer menus  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the printer  
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer  
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.  
2 Remove all paper from the printer.  
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of  
the printer.  
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.  
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
If you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images, clean the areas shown.  
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2 Open the scanner cover.  
White underside of the ADF cover  
White underside of the scanner cover  
Scanner glass  
1
2
3
4
ADF glass  
Maintaining the printer  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.  
4 Close the scanner cover.  
Cleaning the ADF separator rollers  
After you have copied over 50,000 copies using the ADF, clean the ADF separator rollers.  
1 Open the ADF cover.  
2 Unlock the separator roll.  
3 Remove the separator roll.  
4 Use a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water to wipe the separator rollers.  
Maintaining the printer  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Reinstall the separator roll.  
6 Lock the separator roll.  
7 Close the ADF cover.  
Adjusting scanner registration  
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner  
registration:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
3 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registrationappears.  
6 Touch Scanner Manual Registration.  
7 Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page.  
8 Choose the section of the scanner to align.  
Maintaining the printer  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To align the scanner glass (flatbed):  
a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass.  
b Touch Copy Quick Test.  
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.  
c Touch Flatbed.  
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings.  
e Touch Submit.  
f
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.  
Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the  
original.  
To align the ADF:  
a Do one of the following:  
• To align the ADF front: place the Quick Test page faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
• To align the ADF back: place the Quick Test page facedown, short edge first into the ADF.  
b Touch Copy Quick Test.  
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.  
c Touch ADF Front or ADF Back.  
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings.  
e Touch Submit.  
f
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.  
Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the  
original.  
9 Touch Back.  
10 Touch Exit Configuration.  
Storing supplies  
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until  
you are ready to use them.  
Do not expose supplies to:  
• Direct sunlight  
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)  
• High humidity above 80%  
Maintaining the printer  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Salty air  
• Corrosive gases  
• Heavy dust  
Checking the status of supplies  
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.  
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the  
supplies.  
3 Touch View supplies.  
The View supplies screen appears, showing a summary of supply levels.  
Note: The Black Cartridge gauge is only an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge.  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in  
the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.  
Maintaining the printer  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ordering supplies  
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies  
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the  
place where you purchased the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by the use of a supply or replacement item not produced by the  
manufacturer of this printer is not covered under warranty. Degraded print quality may result from using supplies  
or replacement items not produced by the manufacturer of this printer.  
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.  
Ordering toner cartridges  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded:  
1 Remove the toner cartridge.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute toner.  
3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue printing.  
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.  
Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers  
Part name  
Lexmark Return Program Cartridge  
Regular cartridge  
X463A21G  
Toner Cartridge  
X463A11G  
X463H11G  
X463X11G  
High Yield Toner Cartridge  
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge  
X463H21G  
X463X21G  
Ordering a photoconductor kit  
Depending on your printer model, the printer issues a message or a light sequence to let you know the  
photoconductor kit is near its end of life. At this time, order a photoconductor kit. You can also see the status of the  
photoconductor kit by printing a network setup page.  
Part name  
Part number  
Photoconductor kit  
E260X22G  
Maintaining the printer  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ordering ADF replacement parts  
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the  
Automatic Document Feeder.  
Part name  
Part number  
40X5470  
ADF input tray  
ADF separator pad  
ADF separator roll  
40X5472  
40X5471  
Moving the printer to another location  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer  
warranty.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to move it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
• Remove all printer options before moving the printer.  
• Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.  
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.  
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it. For more information, see  
“Selecting a location for the printer” on page 20.  
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:  
• Any cart used to move the printer must be able to support its weight and have a large enough surface to support  
the full footprint of the printer.  
• Keep the printer in an upright position.  
• Avoid severe jarring movements.  
Maintaining the printer  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shipping the printer  
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.  
Maintaining the printer  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Administrative support  
Finding advanced networking and administrator  
information  
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking  
Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark  
Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions, including:  
• Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel  
• Checking the status of the printer supplies  
• Configuring printer settings  
• Configuring network settings  
• Viewing reports  
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Notes:  
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in  
the TCP/IP section.  
• For more information, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web  
Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.  
Checking the device status  
From the Device Status page of the Embedded Web Server, it is possible to see paper tray settings, the level of toner  
in the toner cartridge, the percentage of life remaining in the photoconductor kit, and capacity measurements of  
certain printer parts. To view the device status:  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status.  
Setting up e-mail alerts  
You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be  
changed, added, or unjammed.  
Administrative support  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
To set up e-mail alerts:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.  
4 Select the items for notification, and type in the e-mail addresses.  
5 Click Submit.  
Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.  
Viewing reports  
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the  
printer, the network, and supplies.  
To view reports from a network printer:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.  
Restoring the factory default settings  
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you  
restore the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 52.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default  
setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaultsappears.  
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Nowappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Administrative support  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing jams  
Clearing jams  
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps  
outlined in this section.  
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue. If Jam Recovery  
is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then the  
printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.  
Understanding jam messages and locations  
Note: To resolve any message, all paper or specialty media must be cleared from the entire paper path.  
Open doors and remove trays to access jam areas. The following illustration shows possible jam areas:  
8
1
7
2
3
4
5
6
Access point Description  
Push the button to open the front door. Inside are the toner cartridge and photoconductor kit.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standard exit bin  
Front door  
Manual or multipurpose feeder door  
Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)  
Optional 250- or 550-sheet tray (Tray 2)  
Rear door  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Clearing jams  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Jam message numbers and how to access each jam  
Jam number  
To access the jam  
200-201  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove Tray 1.  
• Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit.  
202  
231  
233  
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.  
Open the front door, and then open the rear door.  
Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.  
Note: For alternative access to the jam, open the front door, and then open the rear door.  
234  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Open the front door, and then open the rear door.  
• Remove Tray 1, and then depress the lever.  
235  
Remove the jam from the standard exit bin.  
Remove Tray 2.  
240-249  
250  
Open the multipurpose feeder door.  
Open the multipurpose feeder door.  
251  
290-295  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Open the ADF cover, and then remove the separator roll.  
• Open the scanner cover.  
• Remove the ADF tray.  
200 and 201 paper jams  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1 Pull the tray completely out.  
Clearing jams  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Remove the jam if you see it here.  
3 If you do not see the jam, open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.  
4 Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jammed sheets.  
Clearing jams  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 If you do not see any jammed sheets, open the rear door.  
6 Remove the jam.  
7 Close the rear door.  
8 Insert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.  
9 Close the front door.  
10 Touch Continue.  
202 paper jam  
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out,  
and then touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If the paper is not exiting the printer:  
1 Pull down the rear door.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
3 Close the rear door.  
4 Touch Continue.  
231 paper jam  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
1 Open the front door.  
1
2
2 Open the rear door.  
Clearing jams  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Remove the jam.  
4 Close the rear door.  
5 Close the front door.  
6 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233 paper jam  
1 Remove the tray from the printer.  
2 Locate the lever shown, and then pull it down to release and remove the jammed sheets.  
3 Insert the tray.  
4 Touch Continue.  
If this does not clear the jam, complete the steps in “231 paper jam” on page 242.  
234 paper jam  
A single jam or multiple jams are in the duplex area of the printer. To locate and remove the jammed sheets, complete  
all the steps in:  
• “231 paper jam” on page 242  
• “233 paper jam” on page 244  
Clearing jams  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
235 paper jam  
1 Gently pull the jammed sheet out of the standard exit bin.  
2 Touch Continue.  
240–249 paper jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Pull the standard tray out.  
3 Remove any jammed paper.  
4 Insert the tray, and then touch Continue.  
5 If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.  
Clearing jams  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6 Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.  
7 Touch Continue.  
250 paper jam  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.  
3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.  
5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.  
6 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
251 paper jam  
A sheet of paper failed to feed from the multipurpose feeder. If it is visible, gently pull the jammed sheet out.  
If the sheet is not visible, complete the following steps:  
1 Open the front door, and then remove the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.  
2 Lift the flap at the front of the printer, and then remove any jams.  
3 Reinsert the photoconductor kit and toner cartridge.  
4 Close the front door.  
5 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
290–294 paper jams  
Clearing jams under the ADF cover  
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.  
2 Open the ADF cover.  
3 Unlock the separator roll.  
Clearing jams  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Remove the separator roll.  
5 Remove the jammed paper.  
6 Reinstall the separator roll.  
Clearing jams  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Lock the separator roll.  
8 Close the ADF cover.  
9 Touch Continue.  
Clearing ADF jams by lifting the scanner cover  
1 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.  
2 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing ADF duplex jams  
If you are making a two-sided copy in the ADF, and your original document jams, it may be necessary to perform the  
following steps to clear the jam:  
1 Remove the ADF input tray.  
2 Pull out the jammed paper by pulling the sheet on the bottom.  
3 Reinstall the ADF input tray.  
4 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solving basic printer problems  
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• All options are properly installed.  
• The printer driver settings are correct.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the  
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only  
diamonds  
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
If Readydoes not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.  
Indicator light blinks red  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
MAKE SURE THE FAX FUNCTION IS SET UP PROPERLY  
For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 123.  
Understanding printer messages  
Answering  
The printer is answering a fax call. Wait for the message to clear.  
Troubleshooting  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Change <src> to <x>  
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper size or type.  
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the  
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:  
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.  
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.  
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are  
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.  
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.  
Check tray <x> connection  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Turn the printer off and then back on.  
If the error occurs a second time:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the tray.  
4 Reattach the tray.  
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
6 Restart the printer.  
If the error occurs again:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the tray.  
4 Contact Customer Support.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.  
Clock battery  
The real-time clock in the printer has a malfunctioning battery. This message appears until the real-time clock battery  
is replaced.  
Close front door  
Close the front door of the printer.  
Close door or insert cartridge  
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and covers.  
Troubleshooting  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Connect <x>bps  
The fax is connected. Wait for the message to clear.  
Note: <x> is the baud rate per second.  
Disk corrupted  
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard  
disk must be reformatted.  
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.  
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled  
The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Fax failed  
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Fax memory full  
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.  
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system  
support person.  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.  
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Fax Station Name not set up  
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Troubleshooting  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Fax Station Number not set up  
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending andreceiving faxes is disableduntil fax is configuredproperly.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Insert Tray <x>  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Install Tray <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Install the specified tray:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Install the specified tray.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Restart the printer.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Invalid PIN  
Enter a valid PIN.  
Load <src> with <x>  
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper type or size.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Load manual feeder with <x>  
<x> is a paper type or size.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot  
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Troubleshooting  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Memory full, cannot print faxes  
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.  
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been  
restarted.  
Network/Network <x>  
The printer is connected to the network.  
Networkindicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board. Network  
<x>indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external  
print server.  
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.  
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.  
No answer  
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.  
No dial tone  
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.  
Paper Change: Load Tray<x> <paper type>  
The printer is set to print on a paper type that is different from what is loaded in Tray 1. Load Tray 1 with the correct  
paper type, or change the paper type settings in the Machine Settings menu or Print Properties to match what is  
loaded in Tray 1.  
Queued for sending  
The scanning process of a fax job completed, but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or  
received. Wait for the message to clear.  
Remove originals from the scanner ADF  
Remove the paper from the ADF to clear the message and continue printing.  
Remove packaging material, check <x>  
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.  
Remove paper from standard output bin  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
Troubleshooting  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Replace <x> if restarting job.  
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner  
to restart the scan job. <x> is a page of the scan job.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the  
message.  
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the  
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately  
after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully  
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,  
or FTP.  
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters  
as the previous job starts.  
Restore Held Jobs?  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.  
Scan Document Too Long  
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.  
Scanner ADF Cover Open  
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.  
Securely clearing disk space  
The printer hard disk wiping process needs to recover. The message clears when all blocks are cleared.  
Serial <x>  
The printer is using a serial cable connection. The serial port is the active communication link.  
Set clock  
The clock is not set. This message appears if no other fax status message appears. It remains until the clock is set.  
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.  
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the  
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Troubleshooting  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Some held jobs were not restored  
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.  
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.  
System busy, preparing resources for job.  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Wait for the message to clear.  
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s).  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
Unsupported disk  
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported  
one.  
Unsupported USB device, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB device.  
Unsupported USB hub, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.  
USB/USB <x>  
The printer is using a USB cable connection. The USB port is the active communication link.  
30 Invalid refill, change toner cartridge  
The printer has detected an invalid, refilled toner cartridge. Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a new one.  
31 Replace defective cartridge  
Remove the defective toner cartridge, and then install a new one.  
32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device  
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.  
34 Short paper  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.  
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
Troubleshooting  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
• Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size  
and type.  
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the  
paper is large enough for the data being printed.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.  
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit  
the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Readyappears, enable Resource Save.  
• Install additional memory.  
37 Insufficient memory to collate job  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted  
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored  
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
38 Memory full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
Troubleshooting  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
50 PPDS font error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer  
will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
51 Defective flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.  
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.  
53 Unformatted flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.  
54 Network <x> software error  
<x> is the number of the network connection.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
54 Serial option <x> error  
<x> is the number of the serial option.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port.  
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer  
and host computer.  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
Troubleshooting  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
54 Standard network software error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>  
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.  
Try one or more of the following:  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the parallel port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Serial port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the serial port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.  
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Standard parallel port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
Troubleshooting  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
56 Standard USB port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 USB port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the USB port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored  
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the  
held jobs. Possible changes include:  
• The printer firmware has been updated.  
• Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.  
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.  
• The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
58 Too many trays attached  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional trays.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Too many flash options installed  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the excess flash memory.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
Troubleshooting  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
59 Incompatible tray <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the specified tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.  
61 Remove defective disk  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.  
62 Disk full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Install a larger printer hard disk.  
63 Unformatted disk  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Format the printer hard disk.  
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.  
80 Routine maintenance needed  
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary  
to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.  
84 Replace PC Kit  
The photoconductor kit is exhausted. Install a new photoconductor kit.  
84 PC Kit life warning  
The photoconductor kit is near exhaustion.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Replace the photoconductor kit.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
88 Cartridge low  
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Troubleshooting  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
88.yy Cartridge nearly low  
The toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
88.yy Replace cartridge  
The toner cartridge is empty.  
1 Replace the toner cartridge.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.  
200–282.yy paper jam  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.  
290-295.yy scanner jam  
Clear all original documents from the scanner.  
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.  
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.  
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and  
clears the message.  
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the  
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after  
the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully  
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,  
or FTP.  
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job  
containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open  
Close the scanner cover.  
Troubleshooting  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
294 ADF Jam  
This jam location may also be identified as 294.04 Duplex Sensor Off Jam, 294.05 Scan Sensor Off  
Jam, or 294.06 ADF Backfeed Jam. To clear this jam:  
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.  
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.  
2 Flex and fan the pages.  
3 Place the pages in the ADF.  
4 Adjust the ADF guides.  
5 From the printer control panel, press  
.
840.01 Scanner Disabled  
This message indicates that the scanner was disabled by the system support person, or the scanner detected a  
hardware error and disabled itself.  
841-846 Scanner Service Error  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, then contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
900–999 Service <message>  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option  
The printer automatically clears the messagein 30 seconds andthen disables the download emulator on thefirmware  
card.  
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Troubleshooting  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Solving printing problems  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print  
The documents contain unavailable fonts.  
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.  
2 Click the printer icon.  
The Print dialog appears.  
3 Click Advanced.  
4 Select Print as image.  
5 Click OK twice.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears  
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices,  
visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT  
Make sure Readyor Power Saverappears on the display before sending a job to print.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED  
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.  
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible  
printer software.  
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING  
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.  
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check  
the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person  
to make sure the network is functioning correctly.  
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Troubleshooting  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED PRINTER CABLE  
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED  
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.  
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGES PRINT  
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.  
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.  
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY  
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.  
Job takes longer than expected to print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.  
CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF  
1 On the home screen, touch  
.
2 Touch Settings.  
3 Touch General Settings.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Recoveryappears.  
5 Touch Print Recovery.  
6 Touch the arrows next to Page Protectuntil Offappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Troubleshooting  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHANGE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS  
When using Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a short delay before the first page is printed. If you  
want to change the settings and need more information, then see “Using Eco-Mode” on page 71 or “Reducing  
printer noise” on page 75.  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Incorrect characters print  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE  
If Ready Hexappears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the  
printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.  
Tray linking does not work  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER  
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.  
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.  
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS  
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.  
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper  
Size/Type menu.  
Large jobs do not collate  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON  
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.  
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.  
Troubleshooting  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity  
of images, and the number of pages in the job.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY  
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.  
Unexpected page breaks occur  
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeoutsappears.  
6 Touch Timeouts.  
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeoutuntil the desired value appears.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Solving copy problems  
Copier does not respond  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Scanner unit does not close  
Make sure there are no obstructions:  
1 Lift the scanner unit.  
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.  
3 Lower the scanner unit.  
Troubleshooting  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Poor copy quality  
These are some examples of poor copy quality:  
• Blank pages  
• Checkerboard pattern  
• Distorted graphics or pictures  
• Missing characters  
• Faded print  
• Dark print  
• Skewed lines  
• Smudges  
• Streaks  
• Unexpected characters  
• White lines in print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. If your printer has an ADF, be sure to  
clean the ADF scanner glass as well. For more information, see: “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 228.  
THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK  
Adjust the copy darkness setting.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
• Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
• If you previously loaded your original document into the ADF, try loading it on the scanner glass.  
UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND  
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.  
• Change the Background Removal setting in the Copy Settings menu.  
Troubleshooting  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT  
• From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo.  
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.  
• From the printer control panel, press the Scale button and adjust the setting.  
TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING  
From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text or Text/Photo.  
THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED  
• From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.  
• From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button and change to a darker setting.  
THE PRINT IS SKEWED  
Notes:  
• If you are loading your original document in the ADF, adjust the ADF paper guides so they touch the edges  
of the pages to be scanned.  
• Check the paper trays to make sure the guides touch the edges of the loaded paper.  
Partial document or photo copies  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup or Print dialog.  
Solving scanner problems  
Checking an unresponsive scanner  
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:  
• The printer is turned on.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
Troubleshooting  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem  
with the scanner.  
Scan was not successful  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM  
Turn off and then restart the computer.  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING  
Close all programs not being used.  
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH  
Select a lower scan resolution.  
Poor scanned image quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning  
the scanner glass” on page 228.  
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION  
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.  
Troubleshooting  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Partial document or photo scans  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup or Print dialog.  
Cannot scan from a computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
Solving fax problems  
Caller ID is not shown  
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.  
Troubleshooting  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings  
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends  
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company  
to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.  
Cannot send or receive a fax  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
ENABLE THE FAX FUNCTION  
For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 123.  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:  
• Telephone  
• Handset  
• Answering machine  
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK  
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.  
2 Listen for a dial tone.  
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.  
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.  
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.  
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST  
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone  
services can be used.  
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface  
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN  
provider.  
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,  
contact your DSL provider.  
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the  
PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.  
Troubleshooting  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE  
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working  
correctly.  
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending  
a fax.  
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.  
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT  
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering  
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.  
CHECK FOR JAMS  
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.  
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING  
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature beforesending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone  
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.  
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION  
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice  
Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.  
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL  
1 Dial the fax number.  
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.  
Can send but not receive faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS  
The ringcount delaysets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension  
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then  
keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
Troubleshooting  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.  
6 Click Submit.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
88 Cartridge lowappears when the toner is low.  
Can receive but not send faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE  
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.  
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY  
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper  
left corner.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY  
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.  
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.  
Received fax has poor print quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RE-SEND THE DOCUMENT  
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:  
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.  
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.  
Troubleshooting  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH  
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
6 Click Submit.  
Solving option problems  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the printer.  
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not  
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option,  
or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the option instruction sheet.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED  
From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see “Updating available options  
in the printer driver” on page 54.  
Troubleshooting  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Drawers  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Pull the tray completely out.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure the guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Insert the tray.  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
Flash memory card  
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Hard disk with adapter  
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Internal Solutions Port  
If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or  
more of the following:  
CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS  
• Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.  
• Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.  
CHECK THE CABLE  
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.  
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY  
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD  
Memory card  
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Troubleshooting  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Solving paper feed problems  
Paper frequently jams  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY  
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the  
multipurpose feeder.  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Paper trays  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Open the paper tray.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may  
not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation  
that came with the paper tray, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the paper tray instruction sheet.  
Troubleshooting  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared  
CHECK THE PAPER PATH  
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam  
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY  
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recoveryappears.  
6 Touch Print Recovery.  
7 Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recoveryuntil Onor Autoappears.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Solving print quality problems  
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not  
correcttheproblem,contactCustomerSupport.Youmayhave aprinter partthatrequires adjustmentor replacement.  
Isolating print quality problems  
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Load Letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
3 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
7 Touch Back.  
8 Touch Exit Configuration.  
Troubleshooting  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Blank pages  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE TONER CARTRIDGE  
Remove the toner cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the toner cartridge.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears, order a new toner cartridge.  
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS  
• Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.  
• Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.  
MAKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED  
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and  
the software program.  
Troubleshooting  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clipped images  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE GUIDES  
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup or Print dialog.  
Ghost images  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Gray background  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Troubleshooting  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING  
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:  
• From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.  
Incorrect margins  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup or Print dialog.  
Paper curl  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Troubleshooting  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print irregularities  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.  
THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the fuser.  
Skewed print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.  
Troubleshooting  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Solid black or white streaks  
ABC  
DEF  
ABC  
DEF  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT  
If the fill pattern is incorrect, then choose a different fill pattern from your software program or application.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE  
• Try a different type of paper.  
• Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
• Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Texture settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY IN THE PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER  
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one.  
Print is too light  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.  
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
Troubleshooting  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE TONER IS LOW  
When 88 Cartridge Lowappears, order a new toner cartridge.  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Print is too dark  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark.  
• From the printer control panel, change this setting from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change this setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change this setting from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Troubleshooting  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Streaked vertical lines  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE TONER IS SMEARED  
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:  
• From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper menu.  
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR  
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Clear any paper you see.  
Troubleshooting  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the charge rolls.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Toner rubs off  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING  
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the  
tray.  
Troubleshooting  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Toner specks  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Transparency print quality is poor  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES  
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Embedded Web Server does not open  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.  
Troubleshooting  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS  
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https://instead of http://before the printer IP  
address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.  
Contacting Customer Support  
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the  
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.  
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside of  
the front door of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.  
In the U.S. or Canada, call (1-800-539-6275). For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com.  
Troubleshooting  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
Product information  
Product name:  
Lexmark X463de, Lexmark X464de, Lexmark X466dte, Lexmark X466dtwe  
Machine type:  
7014, 4569, 4570  
Model(s):  
431, 636, 63W, n01, n02, g01, g02, n11, n12, g11, g12, hn1, hn2, wh1, wh2  
Edition notice  
February 2009  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local  
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in  
certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the  
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products  
or the programs described may be made at any time.  
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make  
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended  
to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation  
and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly  
designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.  
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.  
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.  
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
Bldg 004-2/CSC  
740 New Circle Road NW  
Lexington, KY 40550  
USA  
© 2009 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
Notices  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS  
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer  
software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.  
Trademarks  
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,  
registered in the United States and/or other countries.  
MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.  
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of  
a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be  
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application  
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.  
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:  
Albertus  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE  
Antique Olive  
Apple-Chancery  
Arial  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
CG Times  
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of  
Agfa Corporation  
Chicago  
Clarendon  
Eurostile  
Geneva  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Nebiolo  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
GillSans  
Helvetica  
Hoefler  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry  
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation  
ITC Bookman  
ITC Mona Lisa  
ITC Zapf Chancery  
Joanna  
International Typeface Corporation  
International Typeface Corporation  
International Typeface Corporation  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Arthur Baker  
Marigold  
Monaco  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
New York  
Oxford  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
Arthur Baker  
Palatino  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Notices  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stempel Garamond  
Taffy  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Agfa Corporation  
Times New Roman  
Univers  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance  
information statement  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCCRules. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions: (1)thisdevice maynotcause harmfulinterference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation  
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.  
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended  
cablesorby unauthorized changesormodifications to this equipment. Unauthorizedchanges or modificationscould  
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,  
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294  
for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC  
regulations.  
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:  
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
740 West New Circle Road  
Lexington, KY 40550  
(859) 232–3000  
Noise emission levels  
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Notices  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA  
Printing  
Scanning  
Copying  
Ready  
53 dBA  
49 dBA  
53 dBA  
22 dBA  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive  
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the  
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options,  
visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.  
Mercury statement  
This product contains mercury in the lamp (<5mg Hg). Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries  
Alliance: www.eiae.org.  
Static sensitivity notice  
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the  
metal frame of the printer.  
Notices  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ENERGY STAR  
Laser notice  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser  
products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is  
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal  
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.  
Laser advisory label  
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:  
Power consumption  
Product power consumption  
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Notices  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mode  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
Printing  
Copying  
The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.  
540 W  
560 W  
The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original  
documents.  
Scanning  
Ready  
The product is scanning hard-copy documents.  
The product is waiting for a print job.  
55 W  
45 W  
25 W  
Power Saver The product is in energy-saving mode.  
Off  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned 0 W  
off.  
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous  
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Power Saver  
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to  
the EPA Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods  
of inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of  
time, called the Power Saver Timeout.  
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes):  
30 minutes  
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes.  
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time  
of the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.  
Off mode  
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power  
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.  
Total energy usage  
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided  
in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode  
in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.  
European Community (EC) directives conformity  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC  
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility  
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives has been signed by the Director of Manufacturing  
and Technical Support, Lexmark International, Inc., S.A., Boigny, France.  
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.  
Notices  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Industry Canada compliance statement  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard  
ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements  
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.  
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment  
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal  
equipment such as facsimile.  
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council  
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone  
company.  
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.  
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with  
the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular  
plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant.  
See your setup documentation for more information.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming  
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices  
thatmay be connected to a line, asdetermined by the totalRENs, contact yourlocaltelephone company. Forproducts  
approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format  
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of  
0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will  
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect  
the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for  
you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.  
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network,  
the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark  
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.  
Notices  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service  
commission, or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this  
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,  
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestoris defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other  
electrical surges.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at  
the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and  
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number  
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a  
900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.  
South Africa telecommunications notice  
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)  
is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus  
of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs  
of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product  
labeling.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestoris defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other  
electrical surges.  
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.  
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada  
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence  
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant  
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est  
pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem  
est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.  
Notices  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,  
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un  
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans  
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques  
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire  
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre  
région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions  
électriques.  
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.  
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network  
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of  
terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for  
connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of  
warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of  
telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of  
Telecom's network services.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.  
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom  
customers.  
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment  
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for  
compliance to Telecom's specifications:  
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single  
manual call initiation, and  
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and  
the beginning of the next call attempt.  
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not  
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
Using this product in Switzerland  
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any  
line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present  
on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.  
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse  
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou  
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé  
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.  
Notices  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz  
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer  
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen  
werden. Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz  
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.  
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera  
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le  
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono  
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.  
Notice to Users in the European Union  
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives  
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States  
relatingto electromagneticcompatibility, safetyofelectrical equipment designedfor use within certain voltage limits  
and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing  
and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.  
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.  
Regulatory notices for wireless products  
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,  
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other  
regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any  
persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.  
Notice to users in Brazil  
Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial,  
mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.  
(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).  
Notices  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Industry Canada (Canada)  
This devicecomplies with IndustryCanada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject tothefollowingtwoconditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly  
prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from  
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to  
licensing.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit  
RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health  
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
Cet appareil est conformeà la normeRSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions  
suivantes :  
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles  
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.  
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne  
est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.  
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement  
interdite.  
Pour empêcher touteinterférence radioauservicefaisantl'objetd'une licence, cetappareil doitêtre utilisé àl'intérieur  
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.  
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.  
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre  
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au  
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme  
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.  
Taiwan NCC RF notice statement  
Notices  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice to users in the European Union  
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives  
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States  
relatingto electromagneticcompatibility, safetyofelectrical equipment designedfor use within certain voltage limits  
and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing  
and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France. Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section  
for further compliance information.  
Productsequipped with2.4GHzWirelessLAN optionare inconformity withthe protection requirementsof ECCouncil  
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the  
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within  
certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing  
and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France. Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section  
for further compliance information.  
Česky  
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními  
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
Dansk  
Deutsch  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige  
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den  
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG  
befindet.  
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ  
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ  
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.  
English  
Español  
Eesti  
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the  
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos  
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.  
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ  
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.  
Notices  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Suomi  
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten  
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.  
Français  
Magyar  
Íslenska  
Italiano  
Latviski  
Lietuvių  
Malti  
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences  
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ  
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.  
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar  
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti  
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām  
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas  
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.  
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet  
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.  
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de  
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
Norsk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og  
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Polski  
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi  
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.  
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e  
outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.  
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky  
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.  
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi  
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.  
Svenska  
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga  
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.  
Statement of Limited Warranty  
Lexmark X463de, Lexmark X464de, Lexmark X466dte, Lexmark X466dtwe  
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY  
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-  
specific warranty information that came with your product.  
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from  
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”  
Notices  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limited warranty  
Lexmark warrants that this product:  
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts  
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship  
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair  
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).  
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product  
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the  
product.  
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that  
user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to  
that user.  
Limited warranty service  
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months  
later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer  
shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.  
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver  
your producttotheRemarketeror Lexmark, orshipit prepaidandsuitablypackagedtoaLexmarkdesignatedlocation.  
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated  
location.  
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the  
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.  
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.  
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair  
not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations,  
restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.  
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable  
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).  
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives andthe nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact  
Lexmark on the World Wide Web at www.lexmark.com/support.  
Remotetechnicalsupportisprovidedforthisproductthroughoutitswarrantyperiod. Forproductsnolongercovered  
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.  
Extent of limited warranty  
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted orerror-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints  
produced by any product.  
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:  
—Modification or unauthorized attachments  
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance  
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment  
Notices  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer  
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle  
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications  
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts  
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR  
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS  
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY  
WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE  
WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL  
INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT  
NOTICE.  
Limitation of liability  
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance  
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual  
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.  
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the  
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage  
to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such  
damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.  
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and  
its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are  
intended beneficiaries of this limitation.  
Additional rights  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, ordo not allowthe exclusion or limitation  
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE  
AGREEMENTS  
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY  
ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENTS. IF YOU DO  
NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENTS, PROMPTLY  
RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS  
PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES  
ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.  
Notices  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DEVICE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
The patented printer is licensed for, and designed to work with only genuine Lexmark toner cartridges and developer  
components for the life of the patented printer. Under this patent license, you agree to: (1) use only genuine Lexmark  
toner cartridges and developer components with this printer except as otherwise provided below, and (2) pass this  
license/agreement to any subsequent user of this printer. The patented Lexmark toner cartridges and developer  
components inside are licensed subject to a restriction that they may be used only once. Following their initial use,  
you agree to return them only to Lexmark for recycling. Lexmark toner cartridges are designed to stop working after  
a delivering a fixed amount of toner. A variable amount of toner may remain in them when replacement is required.  
Replacement toner cartridge(s) sold without these terms are available through www.lexmark.com, may be refilled  
by you, or a third party, as the only cartridge alternative to be used with the licensed printer.  
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT  
This Software License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you (either an  
individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”) that, to the extent your Lexmark product or  
Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its  
suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with  
your Lexmark product. The term “Software Program” includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content  
(such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether  
incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.  
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact  
disk) on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under  
normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the  
Software Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program  
media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the  
Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.  
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE  
AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS  
PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE  
PROGRAM. TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRATIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH  
WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.  
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time  
to time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or  
modified. If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for  
breach of those provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program  
or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program.  
TheSoftware Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted  
and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not  
responsible in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software  
applications and/or internet web pages.  
Notices  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY  
OFLEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ISEXPRESSLYLIMITEDTOTHE GREATER OFTHE PRICE  
PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR  
SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO  
SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND  
DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR  
DAMAGE TO, DATA OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY,  
FORLOSSOFPRIVACY ARISINGOUT ORINANY WAYRELATEDTOTHEUSEOFORINABILITY TOUSETHE SOFTWARE  
PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT),  
REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR  
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS,  
AFFILIATES, OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM  
BY YOU BASEDON ATHIRD-PARTYCLAIM, EXCEPTTO THE EXTENTTHISEXCLUSION OFDAMAGESISDETERMINED  
LEGALLY INVALID. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR  
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other  
rights that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts  
or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to  
you.  
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of  
this Software License Agreement:  
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term “Use” means storing, loading, installing,  
executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for  
concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement  
with Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one  
computer. You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has  
the effect of overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance  
ofany trademark, trade name,tradedress or intellectual property notice thatappears on any computer display  
screens normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.  
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or  
installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program’s proprietary notices. You may  
not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.  
c
Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark  
International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Software  
License Agreement.  
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement, all or any portion  
of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties (“Freeware”)  
is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such  
Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the  
time of download or installation. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and  
conditions of such license.  
Notices  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software  
components, media, printed materials, and this Software License Agreement and you may not retain copies of  
the Software Program or components thereof. Thetransfer maynotbe an indirecttransfer, such as a consignment.  
Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these Software  
License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You  
may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this Software License  
Agreement.  
7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original  
Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the  
original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble,  
reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program or assist or otherwise facilitate others to do so,  
except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability,  
error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any  
intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software  
Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.  
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This Software License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original  
Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or  
supplement.  
10 TERM. This Software License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate  
this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications,  
documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your  
license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this Software License Agreement. Upon such  
termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications,  
documentation, and merged portions in any form.  
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and  
services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Software License Agreement or your Use of the Software  
Program.  
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Software License Agreement may  
be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under  
applicable law.  
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky,  
United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts  
for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.  
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at  
private expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program are as set forth in this  
Software License Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any  
equivalent agency regulation or contract clause).  
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information  
you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by  
you. Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent  
necessary to provide such services.  
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software  
Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software  
Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear,  
chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.  
Notices  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this Software License  
Agreement electronically. This means that when you click the “Agree” or “I accept” button on this page or use  
this product, you acknowledge your agreement to these Software License Agreement terms and conditions and  
that you are doing so with the intent to “sign” a contract with Lexmark.  
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place  
you sign this Software License Agreementand, ifapplicable, you are dulyauthorizedby your employer or principal  
to enter into this contract.  
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Software License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this  
Software License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you  
and Lexmark relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and  
conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and  
representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this Software  
License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this Software  
License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software  
Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this  
Software License Agreement, the terms of this Software License Agreement shall control.  
MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES  
1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions  
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at  
http://go.microsoft.om/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.  
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which  
Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.  
Notices  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
57 Configuration change, held jobs  
were not restored 262  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 262  
58 Too many trays attached 262  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 263  
61 Remove defective disk 263  
62 Disk full 263  
63 Unformatted disk 263  
80 Routine maintenance  
needed 263  
84 PC Kit life warning 263  
84 Replace PC Kit 263  
840.01 Scanner Disabled 265  
841-846 Scanner Service Error 265  
88 Cartridge low 263  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 264  
88.yy Replace cartridge 264  
900–999 Service <message> 265  
canceling a job  
Numerics  
from Macintosh 103  
from the printer control  
panel 103  
from Windows 103  
card stock  
loading 82  
tips 98  
Change <src> to <x> 253  
Check tray <x> connection 253  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 252  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 271  
checking device status  
on Embedded Web Server 236  
cleaning  
ADF separator rollers 229  
exterior of the printer 228  
scanner glass 228  
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 265  
200–282.yy paper jam 264  
250-sheet drawer  
installing 50  
290-295.yy scanner jam 264  
293 Replace all originals if restarting  
job 264  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 264  
294 ADF Jam 265  
30 Invalid refill, change toner  
cartridge 258  
31 Replace defective cartridge 258  
32 Cartridge part number  
unsupported by device 258  
34 Short paper 258  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 259  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 259  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held  
Jobs were deleted 259  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 259  
38 Memory full 259  
clock battery 253  
A
Close door or insert cartridge 253  
Close front door 253  
collating copies 109  
Confidential print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
Confidential Print menu 178  
configuration information  
wireless network 55  
configurations  
printer 18  
Configure MP menu 157  
configuring  
port settings 65  
configuring the e-mail  
settings 117  
Connect <x>bps 254  
connecting the printer to  
answering machine 126  
computer modem 132  
distinctive ring service 126  
regional adapters 128  
telephone 126  
conservation settings  
brightness, adjusting 73  
Eco-Mode 71  
Active NIC menu 164  
address book, fax  
using 137  
ADF  
copying using 105  
ADF pick assembly  
ordering 234  
ADF separator roll  
ordering 234  
ADF separator rollers, cleaning 229  
Answering 252  
AppleTalk menu 170  
attaching cables 51  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 259  
50 PPDS font error 260  
51 Defective flash detected 260  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 260  
53 Unformatted flash  
detected 260  
54 Network <x> software error 260  
54 Serial option <x> error 260  
54 Standard network software  
error 261  
55 Unsupported option in slot 261  
550-sheet drawer  
B
battery, clock 253  
brightness, adjusting 73  
buttons, home screen 24  
buttons, printer control panel 23  
buttons, touch screen 25  
installing 50  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 261  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 261  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 261  
56 Standard USB port disabled 262  
56 USB port <x> disabled 262  
C
cables  
Ethernet 51  
USB 51  
calling Customer Support 290  
Index  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Saver 72  
Quiet Mode 75  
standard exit bin lighting 73  
conserving supplies 70  
contacting Customer Support 290  
control panel, printer 23  
copy quality  
adjusting 108  
improving 115  
copy screen  
options 113, 114  
Copy Settings menu 188  
copy troubleshooting  
copier does not respond 269  
partial document or photo  
copies 271  
poor copy quality 270  
poor scanned image quality 272  
scanner unit does not close 269  
copying  
Custom Types menu 161  
Ethernet port 51  
exterior of the printer  
cleaning 228  
e-mail  
canceling 120  
D
date and time  
setting 134  
enabling 116  
Default Source menu 154  
directory list, printing 102  
Disk corrupted 254  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 254  
Disk Wiping menu 179  
display troubleshooting  
display is blank 252  
display shows only  
diamonds 252  
display, printer control panel 23  
adjusting brightness 73  
distinctive ring service  
connecting to 126  
documents, printing  
from Macintosh 96  
from Windows 96  
duplexing  
notice of low supply level 236  
notice of paper jam 236  
notice of paper needed 236  
notice that different paper is  
needed 236  
e-mail function  
setting up 117  
e-mail screen  
advanced options 122  
options 120, 121  
E-mail Settings menu 203  
e-mailing  
adding message line 119  
adding subject line 119  
changing output file type 120  
configuring the e-mail  
settings 117  
adding a date and time  
stamp 111  
adding an overlay message 112  
adjusting quality 108  
canceling a copy job 112  
collating copies 109  
custom job (job build) 110  
enlarging 108  
copy jobs 108  
fax jobs, incoming 139  
print jobs 96  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 117  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 118  
E
e-mail setup 116  
Eco-Mode setting 71  
Embedded Web Server 236  
administrator settings 236  
checking device status 236  
does not open 289  
networking settings 236  
setting up e-mail alerts 236  
Embedded Web Server  
Administrator's Guide 236  
emission  
notices 293, 296, 297, 300, 301, 302  
enlarging a copy 108  
envelopes  
loading 82  
tips 97  
environmental settings  
brightness, adjusting 73  
Eco-Mode 71  
Power Saver 72  
Quiet Mode 75  
standard exit bin lighting 73  
Ethernet networking  
Macintosh 63  
from one size to another 107  
improving copy quality 115  
making transparencies 106  
multiple pages on one sheet 110  
on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 108  
pausing a print job to make  
copies 111  
photos 106  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 109  
quick copy 105  
reducing 108  
selecting a tray 107  
to letterhead 107  
using the ADF 105  
using the scanner glass  
(flatbed) 106  
Custom Names menu 161  
custom paper type  
assigning 88  
Custom Scan Sizes menu 161  
Custom Type <x>  
changing name 88  
setting up e-mail function 117  
using shortcut numbers 118  
using the address book 119  
using the touch screen 118  
F
factory defaults, restoring  
printer control panel menus 237  
fax card  
installing 47  
fax connection  
connecting the printer to the wall  
jack 124  
connecting to a DSL line 125  
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 125  
fax connections  
answering machine 126  
computer modem 132  
distinctive ring service 126  
regional adapters 128  
telephone 126  
Fax failed 254  
Fax memory full 254  
Windows 63  
Index  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)  
menu 194  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)  
menu 201  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact  
system administrator. 254  
fax quality, improving 142  
fax screen  
advanced options 141  
options 140, 141  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.  
Contact system administrator. 254  
fax setup 123  
Fax Station Name not set up 254  
Fax Station Number not set up 255  
fax troubleshooting  
blocking junk faxes 139  
caller ID is not shown 273  
can receive but not send  
faxes 276  
viewing a fax log 139  
FCC notices 293, 297, 300  
fiber optic  
network setup 63  
finding  
information 17  
publications 17  
Web site 17  
Finishing menu 218  
firmware card  
I
Image menu 226  
information, finding 17  
Insert Tray <x> 255  
Install tray <x> 255  
installation  
wireless network 56, 59  
installing  
options in driver 54  
printer software 53  
installing printer software  
adding options 54  
Internal Solutions Port  
installing 36  
troubleshooting 278  
Internal Solutions Port, network  
changing port settings 65  
Invalid PIN 255  
installing 34  
flash drive 101  
Flash Drive menu 211  
flash memory card  
installing 34  
troubleshooting 278  
font sample list  
printing 102  
forwarding faxes 143  
FTP  
IPv6 menu 169  
can send but not receive  
faxes 275  
cannot send or receive a fax 274  
received fax has poor print  
quality 276  
address book 145  
FTP quality, improving 148  
FTP screen  
advanced options 147  
options 146, 147  
FTP Settings menu 208  
J
jams  
accessing 238  
avoiding 78  
understanding messages 238  
jams, clearing  
200-201 239  
202 241  
231 242  
233 244  
234 244  
235 245  
faxing  
canceling a fax job 140  
changing resolution 138  
choosing a fax connection 123  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 136  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 136  
G
green settings  
brightness, adjusting 73  
Eco-Mode 71  
Power Saver 72  
Quiet Mode 75  
standard exit bin lighting 73  
guidelines  
letterhead 97  
transparencies 97  
240–249 245  
250 246  
251 247  
enabling 133  
fax setup 123, 133, 134  
forwarding faxes 143  
holding faxes 142  
improving fax quality 142  
making a fax lighter or  
darker 138  
printing on both sides  
(duplexing) 139  
sending a fax at a scheduled  
time 138  
sending using the computer 135  
sending using the printer control  
panel 135  
setting the date and time 134  
turning daylight saving time on or  
off 134  
290–294 248  
L
H
labels, paper  
hard disk with adapter  
troubleshooting 278  
held jobs 99  
tips 98  
letterhead  
copying to 107  
loading 82  
tips on using 97  
LexLink menu 171  
light  
standard exit bin 73  
light, indicator 23, 252  
linking trays 87  
Load <src> with <x> 255  
Load manual feeder with <x> 255  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
Help menu 227  
holding faxes 142  
home screen  
buttons 24  
how to set up the printer 55  
HTML menu 225  
using shortcuts 137  
using the address book 137  
Index  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
loading  
multipurpose feeder 82  
trays 78  
Security Audit Log 180  
Serial <x> 175  
Set Date/Time 181  
Settings 182  
printer hard disk 29, 43  
options, touch-screen  
copy 113, 114  
e-mail 120, 121, 122  
fax 140, 141  
FTP 146, 147  
ordering  
ADF pick assembly 234  
ADF separator roll 234  
ordering supplies 233  
output file type  
Setup 216  
M
SMTP Setup menu 166  
Standard Network 164  
Standard USB 172  
Substitute Size 157  
TCP/IP 168  
Universal Setup 162  
Utilities 221  
Wireless 169  
XPS 227  
Miscellaneous menu 178  
moving the printer 234  
multiple pages on one sheet 110  
multipurpose feeder  
loading 82  
Macintosh  
wireless network installation 59  
memory card  
installing 32  
troubleshooting 278  
Memory full, cannot print  
faxes 256  
menu settings page  
printing 52  
changing 120  
P
menus  
Active NIC 164  
AppleTalk 170  
paper  
characteristics 90  
letterhead 92  
loading, multipurpose feeder 82  
preprinted forms 92  
recycled 70, 91  
selecting 91  
setting size 77  
setting type 77  
storing 92  
unacceptable 91  
Universal Paper Size 162  
Universal size setting 77  
paper capacities  
trays 95  
paper capacity  
multipurpose feeder 95  
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>  
<paper type> 256  
paper feed troubleshooting  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 280  
paper jams  
accessing jam areas 238  
avoiding 78  
Confidential Print 178  
Configure MP 157  
Copy Settings 188  
Custom Names 161  
Custom Scan Sizes 161  
Custom Types 161  
Default Source 154  
diagram of 153  
Disk Wiping 179  
E-mail Settings 203  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 194  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 201  
Finishing 218  
Flash Drive 211  
FTP Settings 208  
Help 227  
HTML 225  
Image 226  
IPv6 169  
LexLink 171  
Miscellaneous 178  
NetWare 170  
N
NetWare menu 170  
Network 256  
Network <x> 256  
Network <x> menu 164  
Network Card menu 167  
Network Reports menu 167  
network setup page 53  
Networking Guide 236  
No analog phone line connected to  
modem, fax is disabled. 256  
No answer 256  
No dial tone 256  
noise  
reducing 75  
noise emission levels 293  
notices 292, 293, 294, 295, 296,  
297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302  
Network <x> 164  
Network Card 167  
Network Reports 167  
Paper Loading 159  
Paper Size/Type 154  
Paper Texture 158  
Paper Weight 159  
Parallel <x> menu 173  
PCL Emul 223  
PDF 222  
PostScript 222  
Quality 220  
Reports 163  
paper jams, clearing  
200-201 239  
231 242  
233 244  
234 244  
235 245  
240–249 245  
250 246  
251 247  
290–294 248  
paper labels  
loading 82  
Paper Loading menu 159  
O
options  
250-sheet drawer 50  
550-sheet drawer 50  
fax card 29, 47  
firmware card 29, 34  
flash memory card 34  
internal 29  
Internal Solutions Port 29, 36  
memory card 29, 32  
networking 29  
ports 29  
Index  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Size/Type menu 154  
paper sizes  
supported by the printer 93  
Paper Texture menu 158  
paper type  
custom 88  
paper types  
print troubleshooting  
error reading USB drive 266  
held jobs do not print 267  
incorrect characters print 268  
incorrect margins 283  
jammed page does not  
reprint 280  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held  
Jobs were deleted 259  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 259  
38 Memory full 259  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 259  
duplex support 94  
supported by printer 94  
where to load 94  
Paper Weight menu 159  
Parallel <x> menu 173  
pausing the current print job  
to make copies 111  
PCL Emul menu 223  
PDF menu 222  
job prints from wrong tray 268  
job prints on wrong paper 268  
job takes longer than  
expected 267  
jobs do not print 266  
Large jobs do not collate 268  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 266  
50 PPDS font error 260  
51 Defective flash detected 260  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 260  
53 Unformatted flash  
detected 260  
54 Network <x> software  
error 260  
54 Serial option <x> error 260  
54 Standard network software  
error 261  
55 Unsupported option in  
slot 261  
paper curl 283  
photoconductor kit  
ordering 233  
photos  
paper frequently jams 279  
tray linking does not work 268  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 269  
copying 106  
port settings  
configuring 65  
PostScript menu 222  
Power Saver  
printer  
configurations 18  
minimum clearances 20  
models 18  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 261  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 261  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 261  
adjusting 72  
moving 234  
56 Standard USB port  
print job  
selecting a location 20  
shipping 235  
printer control panel 23  
factory defaults, restoring 237  
printer hard disk  
installing 43  
printer messages  
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 265  
200–282.yy paper jam 264  
290-295.yy scanner jam 264  
293 Replace all originals if  
restarting job 264  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 264  
294 ADF Jam 265  
30 Invalid refill, change toner  
cartridge 258  
31 Replace defective  
cartridge 258  
32 Cartridge part number  
unsupported by device 258  
34 Short paper 258  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 259  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 259  
disabled 262  
canceling from Macintosh 103  
canceling from Windows 103  
print quality  
cleaning the scanner glass 228  
print quality test pages,  
printing 103  
print quality troubleshooting  
blank pages 281  
characters have jagged  
edges 281  
clipped images 282  
ghost images 282  
gray background 282  
poor transparency quality 289  
print irregularities 284  
print is too dark 286  
print is too light 285  
print quality test pages 280  
skewed print 284  
solid black streaks 285  
solid white streaks 285  
streaked vertical lines 287  
toner fog or background  
shading 288  
56 USB port <x> disabled 262  
57 Configuration change, held  
jobs were not restored 262  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 262  
58 Too many trays attached 262  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 263  
61 Remove defective disk 263  
62 Disk full 263  
63 Unformatted disk 263  
80 Routine maintenance  
needed 263  
84 PC Kit life warning 263  
84 Replace PC Kit 263  
840.01 Scanner Disabled 265  
841-846 Scanner Service  
Error 265  
88 Cartridge low 263  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 264  
88.yy Replace cartridge 264  
900–999 Service <message> 265  
Answering 252  
Change <src> to <x> 253  
Check tray <x> connection 253  
clock battery 253  
toner rubs off 288  
toner specks 289  
Close door or insert cartridge 253  
Index  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Close front door 253  
Connect <x>bps 254  
Disk corrupted 254  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 254  
Fax failed 254  
Fax memory full 254  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact  
system administrator. 254  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.  
Contact system  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. Deleting held job(s). 258  
Unsupported disk 258  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 258  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
remove 258  
USB/USB <x> 258  
printer options troubleshooting  
drawers 278  
Remove packaging material, check  
<x> 256  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 256  
Repeat print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 257  
administrator. 254  
flash memory card 278  
hard disk with adapter 278  
Internal Solutions Port 278  
memory card 278  
option not working 277  
paper trays 279  
reports  
viewing 237  
Reports menu 163  
Reserve print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
Fax Station Name not set up 254  
Fax Station Number not set  
up 255  
Insert Tray <x> 255  
Install tray <x> 255  
Invalid PIN 255  
printer problems, solving  
basic 252  
printing  
printing from Windows 100  
resolution, fax  
changing 138  
Load <src>with <x> 255  
Load manual feeder with  
<x> 255  
directory list 102  
Restore Held Jobs? 257  
Memory full, cannot print  
faxes 256  
Network 256  
font sample list 102  
from flash drive 101  
from Macintosh 96  
S
safety information 15, 16  
Scan Document Too Long 257  
Scan Profile options 150, 151  
scan profile options 150  
scan quality, improving 152  
scan to a computer  
options 150, 151  
scan troubleshooting  
cannot scan from a  
computer 273  
partial document or photo  
scans 273  
scan was not successful 272  
scanner unit does not close 269  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 272  
scanner  
Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) 22  
functions 21  
registration 230  
scanner glass 22  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 257  
scanner glass  
cleaning 228  
scanner glass (flatbed)  
copying using 106  
Network <x> 256  
from Windows 96  
No analog phone line connected  
to modem, fax is disabled. 256  
No answer 256  
No dial tone 256  
Paper Change: Load Tray<x>  
<paper type> 256  
Queued for sending 256  
Remove originals from the scanner  
ADF 256  
Remove packaging material,  
check <x> 256  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 256  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 257  
installing printer software 53  
menu settings page 52  
network setup page 53  
print quality test pages 103  
two-sided (duplex) 96  
printing confidential and other held  
jobs  
from Macintosh computer 100  
from Windows 100  
publications, finding 17  
Q
Quality menu 220  
Queued for sending 256  
Quiet Mode 75  
Restore Held Jobs? 257  
Scan Document Too Long 257  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 257  
Securely clearing disk space 257  
Serial <x> 257  
R
recycled paper  
using 91  
recycling 294  
Set clock 257  
Lexmark packaging 74  
Lexmark products 74  
toner cartridges 75  
WEEE statement 294  
reducing a copy 108  
Remove originals from the scanner  
ADF 256  
SMTP server not set up. Contact  
system administrator. 257  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 258  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. 258  
scanning to a computer 149  
improving scan quality 152  
scanning to a flash drive 152  
Index  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
scanning to an FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the  
computer 145  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 145  
improving FTP quality 148  
using shortcut numbers 144  
using the address book 145  
using the keypad 144  
Securely clearing disk space 257  
Security Audit Log menu 180  
Serial <x> 257  
Serial <x> menu 175  
serial port 67  
serial printing  
setting up 67  
Set clock 257  
supplies 231  
troubleshooting, copy  
copier does not respond 269  
partial document or photo  
copies 271  
poor copy quality 270  
poor scanned image quality 272  
scanner unit does not close 269  
troubleshooting, display  
display is blank 252  
subject and message information  
adding to e-mail 119  
Substitute Size menu 157  
supplies  
conserving 70  
status of 232  
storing 231  
using recycled paper 70  
supplies, ordering 233  
ADF pick assembly 234  
ADF separator roll 234  
photoconductor kit 233  
system board  
accessing 30  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. 258  
display shows only  
diamonds 252  
troubleshooting, fax  
blocking junk faxes 139  
caller ID is not shown 273  
can receive but not send  
faxes 276  
can send but not receive  
faxes 275  
cannot send or receive a fax 274  
received fax has poor print  
quality 276  
troubleshooting, paper feed  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 280  
troubleshooting, print  
error reading USB drive 266  
held jobs do not print 267  
incorrect characters print 268  
incorrect margins 283  
jammed page does not  
reprint 280  
job prints from wrong tray 268  
job prints on wrong paper 268  
job takes longer than  
expected 267  
Set Date/Time menu 181  
setting  
paper size 77  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. Deleting held job(s). 258  
paper type 77  
T
TCP/IP address 168  
Universal Paper Size 77  
setting up  
fax 123  
serial printing 67  
setting up the printer  
on a wired network  
(Macintosh) 63  
on a wired network  
(Windows) 63  
Settings menu 182  
Setup menu 216  
shipping the printer 235  
shortcuts, creating  
e-mail 117, 118  
fax destination 136  
FTP destination 145  
SMTP server not set up. Contact  
system administrator. 257  
SMTP Setup menu 166  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 258  
TCP/IP menu 168  
telecommunication  
notices 297, 298, 299, 300  
tips  
card stock 98  
envelopes 97  
labels, paper 98  
letterhead 97  
toner cartridges  
recycling 75  
touch screen  
buttons 25  
transparencies  
loading 82  
making 106  
tips on using 97  
tray linking 88  
tray unlinking 88  
trays  
linking 87, 88  
loading 78  
unlinking 87, 88  
troubleshooting  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 252  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 271  
jobs do not print 266  
Large jobs do not collate 268  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 266  
paper curl 283  
paper frequently jams 279  
tray linking does not work 268  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 269  
troubleshooting, print quality  
blank pages 281  
characters have jagged  
edges 281  
clipped images 282  
standard exit bin  
light 73  
Standard Network menu 164  
Standard USB menu 172  
status of supplies, checking 232  
steps  
setting up printer 55  
storing  
contacting Customer  
Support 290  
solving basic printer  
problems 252  
ghost images 282  
gray background 282  
poor transparency quality 289  
paper 92  
Index  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
print irregularities 284  
print is too dark 286  
print is too light 285  
print quality test pages 280  
skewed print 284  
solid black streaks 285  
solid white streaks 285  
streaked vertical lines 287  
toner fog or background  
shading 288  
toner rubs off 288  
toner specks 289  
troubleshooting, printer options  
drawers 278  
W
Web site  
finding 17  
Windows  
wireless network installation 56  
wired network setup  
using Macintosh 63  
using Windows 63  
Wireless menu 169  
wireless network  
configuration information 55  
installation, using Macintosh 59  
installation, using Windows 56  
flash memory card 278  
hard disk with adapter 278  
Internal Solutions Port 278  
memory card 278  
X
XPS menu 227  
option not working 277  
paper trays 279  
troubleshooting, scan  
cannot scan from a  
computer 273  
partial document or photo  
scans 273  
scan was not successful 272  
scanner unit does not close 269  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 272  
U
Universal Paper Size  
setting 77  
Universal Setup menu 162  
unlinking trays 87  
Unsupported disk 258  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 258  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
remove 258  
USB port 51  
USB/USB <x> 258  
Utilities menu 221  
V
Verify print jobs 99  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 100  
printing from Windows 100  
viewing  
reports 237  
Index  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

LaCie Computer Drive Little Big Disk Quadra User Manual
Lenoxx Electronics Heat Pump XP15 User Manual
Leviton Network Router 47603 24P User Manual
LG Electronics Cell Phone 370H User Manual
Linear Vacuum Cleaner Central Vacuum User Manual
Linksys Network Card USB10T User Manual
Mace Security Camera CAM 77 User Manual
Magnavox Home Theater System MRD100 User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Fan 7629613 User Manual
Mercedes Benz Automobile 2001 CLK 430 User Manual